JP2021053244A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve the input accuracy of a setting value in a state where change processing of the setting value can be performed.SOLUTION: A sound output device 206 in a game machine 100 is controlled on the basis of a sound volume adjustment mode that includes a special adjustment mode of regulating a sound volume adjustment motion based on a sound volume adjustment operation of a sound volume adjustment button 209a in a state where setting change processing is executed, and a normal adjustment mode that can permit the sound volume adjustment motion based on the sound volume adjustment operation in a state where the setting change processing is not executed. The sound volume adjustment mode becomes the special adjustment mode on the basis of the execution of the setting change processing, and the sound volume adjustment mode becomes the normal adjustment mode at a prescribed timing after the termination of the setting change processing. Unless the setting change processing is executed again after the termination of the setting change processing, the sound volume adjustment mode does not shift to the special adjustment mode from the normal adjustment mode.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 63

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a ball gaming machine (pachinko machine).

Conventionally, a gaming machine that advances a game based on a set value of a plurality of stages having a different degree of advantage has been disclosed (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP-A-2019-72075

However, the conventional game machine has a problem that the input accuracy of the set value is not sufficient at the time of changing the set value.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of improving the input accuracy of a set value in a state where the set value can be changed.

In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine according to one aspect of the present invention includes a game control means for advancing the game according to one of the set values being set among the set values of a plurality of stages, and one of the set values. A setting changing means capable of executing a setting changing process for changing a setting value to one of the plurality of stages of setting values, an audio output device whose volume is controlled by a volume setting value, and a volume control for adjusting the volume setting value. The voice output device includes a volume control device capable of accepting an operation, and the voice output device performs a volume control operation of adjusting the volume based on the volume setting value corresponding to the progress of the game or the volume control operation of the volume control device. A special adjustment mode that regulates the volume adjustment operation based on the volume adjustment operation when the setting change process is being executed, and the volume adjustment operation when the setting change process is not executed. The volume control operation is controlled based on the volume control mode including the normal control mode that allows the volume control operation based on the above, and based on the execution of the setting change process, the volume control mode becomes the special control mode, and the setting change process is performed. At a predetermined timing after the end, the volume adjustment mode becomes the normal adjustment mode, and the volume adjustment mode changes from the normal adjustment mode to the special adjustment mode unless the setting change process is executed again after the end of the setting change process. It is characterized by not migrating.

Further, in the game machine according to the one aspect of the present invention, the state in which the setting change process can be executed ends based on the specific operation being performed, and the specific operation is not performed in the volume control mode. As long as it is maintained in the special adjustment mode.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the one aspect of the present invention, the volume control mode is the volume control operation of the voice output device based on the volume control operation when a predetermined transition trigger occurs during the normal control mode. May shift to a specific adjustment state that regulates
The specific adjustment state ends based on the fact that the specific adjustment state end condition is satisfied when the notification of the specific mode is not executed in the effect device capable of executing the predetermined effect.
In the normal adjustment mode after the end of the specific adjustment state, the volume adjustment operation based on the volume adjustment operation may be allowed in the voice output device.

Further, in the gaming machine according to the one aspect of the present invention, the voice output device may not be restricted from the volume adjustment operation based on the volume adjustment operation when the adjustment mode is the normal adjustment mode.

Further, in the game machine according to the one aspect of the present invention, the sound output device may be set to a mute state in which no sound is output, and may be in a power saving state in which power consumption is reduced, and the setting change process is being executed. It is not necessary to shift to the power saving state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the input accuracy of the set value in a state where the set value can be changed.

It is a perspective view of the schematic structure of the game machine which shows the state which the door is opened. It is a front view of a game machine. It is a front view of the game board provided in the game machine. It is a back view of the game machine with the back cover removed. It is a back view of the game machine with the back cover attached. It is a block diagram of a game machine. It is a figure which shows the use example of the memory area of a main RAM. It is a figure explaining the big hit determination random number determination table at the time of low probability. It is a figure explaining the big hit determination random number determination table at the time of high accuracy. It is a figure explaining the hit symbol random number determination table. It is a figure explaining the reach group determination random number determination table. It is a figure explaining the reach mode determination random number determination table. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation pattern random number determination table. It is a figure explaining the fluctuation time determination table. It is a figure explaining the special electric accessory actuating ram set table. It is a figure explaining the game state setting table. It is a figure explaining the hit determination random number determination table. (A) is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol fluctuation time data table, and (b) is a diagram for explaining an open / close control pattern table. It is a flowchart (the 1) explaining the CPU initialization process in a main control board. It is a flowchart (the 2) explaining the CPU initialization process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the main loop processing in the main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the evacuation process at the time of power-off in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the setting value related processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the switch management process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the gate passing process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the process of passing through the 1st start port in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the 2nd start port passage processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol random number acquisition process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the effect determination processing at the time of acquisition in a main control board. It is a figure explaining the special game management phase. It is a flowchart explaining the special game management process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol change waiting process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol variation number determination process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special symbol change in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the special symbol stop symbol display processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening opening preprocessing in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening opening / closing switching process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening opening control process in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening closing effective processing in a main control board. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening end wait processing in a main control board. It is a figure explaining the variation production decision table. It is a flowchart explaining the sub-CPU initialization process in a sub-control board. It is a flowchart explaining the subtimer interrupt processing in a sub-control board. It is a flowchart explaining the customer waiting command reception processing in a sub-control board. It is a flowchart explaining the variable command reception processing in a sub-control board. It is a flowchart explaining the customer waiting end processing in a sub-control board. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot opening designation command reception process in a sub-control board. It is a flowchart explaining the setting-related end designation command reception processing in a sub-control board. It is a flowchart explaining the process of waiting for a customer in a sub-control board. It is a flowchart explaining the time schedule management process in a sub-control board. It is a flowchart explaining the input state control process in a sub-control board. It is a flowchart explaining the effect button detection control process in a sub-control board. It is a flowchart explaining the operation control process at the time of input in the effect button control process. It is a figure explaining an example of the transition of the input state of an effect operation apparatus, and the operation mode of an effect apparatus in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the state of the effect device in the setting change state. It is a figure which shows an example of the state of the effect device in the power saving mode. It is a figure explaining another example of the transition of the input state of an effect operation apparatus and the operation mode of an effect apparatus in time series. It is a figure which shows an example of the state of the effect device in the setting confirmation state. It is a flowchart explaining adjustment state control processing in a sub-control board. It is a flowchart explaining adjustment button detection control processing in a sub-control board. It is a flowchart explaining the operation control processing at the time of adjustment in the adjustment button control processing. It is a figure explaining an example of the transition of the adjustment state of the adjustment button and the operation mode of an effect device in time series. It is a figure explaining another example of the transition of the adjustment state of the adjustment button and the operation mode of an effect device in time series.

Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the accompanying drawings. The dimensions, materials, and other specific numerical values shown in such an embodiment are merely examples for facilitating the understanding of the invention, and do not limit the present invention unless otherwise specified. In the present specification and drawings, elements having substantially the same function and configuration are designated by the same reference numerals to omit duplicate description, and elements not directly related to the present invention are not shown. To do. Further, in the description of the game machine according to the present embodiment, the left side is the left side when viewed from the player who is seated facing the game machine, the right side is the right side when viewed from the player, and the upper side is the upper side when viewed from the player. Is on the top, the bottom side is on the bottom when viewed from the player, the front side is on the front side when viewed from the player, and the back side is on the back side when viewed from the player.

(First Embodiment)
In order to facilitate understanding of the first embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as "the present embodiment"), first, the mechanical configuration and the electrical configuration of the game machine will be briefly described, and then the specifics on each substrate will be described. Processing will be explained.

FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the game machine 100 of the present embodiment, showing a state in which the door is opened. As shown in the figure, the game machine 100 has an outer frame 102 in which a surrounding space is formed by four sides assembled in a substantially rectangular shape, an inner frame 104 that is openably and closably attached to the outer frame 102 by a hinge mechanism, and an inner frame. The 104 is provided with a front frame 106 that is openably and closably attached by a hinge mechanism.

Similar to the outer frame 102, the inner frame 104 has a surrounding space formed by four sides assembled in a substantially rectangular shape, and the game board 108 is held in the surrounding space. Further, the front frame 106 holds a transparent plate 110 made of glass or resin. When the inner frame 104 and the front frame 106 are closed with respect to the outer frame 102, the game board 108 and the transmission plate 110 face each other substantially in parallel while maintaining a predetermined interval, and from the front side of the game machine 100. , The game board 108 becomes visible through the transparent plate 110.

(Detailed configuration of the game machine)
Next, the detailed configuration of the game machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3. In FIG. 2, the second starting port 122, the second winning opening 128, the nail 131, and the wind turbine 133 (all of which will be described later) provided on the game board 108 are not shown. Further, in FIG. 2, the first large winning opening 126 (described later) in the closed state is shown, and in FIG. 3, the second starting opening 122, the first large winning opening 126, and the second large winning opening 128 in the open state are shown. It is illustrated.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the game machine 100. As shown in FIG. 2, an operation handle 112 projecting to the front side of the game machine 100 is provided at the lower part of the front frame 106. The operation handle 112 is provided so that the player can rotate the operation handle 112, and when the player rotates the operation handle 112 to perform a firing operation, the operation handle 112 is fired at a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the operation handle 112 (not shown). A game ball is launched by the mechanism. The game ball launched in this way rises between the rails 114a and 114b provided on the game board 108 and is guided to the game area 116.

The game area 116 is a space formed at a distance between the game board 108 and the transmission plate 110, and is an area in which the game ball can flow down or roll. As shown in FIG. 3, the game board 108 is provided with a large number of nails 131 and one windmill 133, and the game balls guided to the game area 116 collide with the nails and the windmills in irregular directions. It flows down and rolls. In FIG. 3, a large number of nails 131 provided in the game area 116 are illustrated by white circles, and only one of the large number of nails 131 has a reference reference numeral.

As shown in FIGS. 2 and 3, the game area 116 includes a first game area 116a and a second game area 116b in which the degree of entry of the game ball differs from each other according to the firing intensity of the firing mechanism. The first game area 116a is located on the left side of the game area 116 as seen from the player facing the game machine 100, and the second game area 116b is the game area 116 as seen from the player facing the game machine 100. It is located on the right side of. Since the rails 114a and 114b are on the left side of the game area 116, the game ball launched by the launch mechanism with a firing intensity lower than the predetermined intensity enters the first game area 116a and is launched with a firing intensity equal to or higher than the predetermined strength. The resulting game ball enters the second game area 116b.

Further, the game area 116 is provided with a general winning opening 118, a first starting opening 120, and a second starting opening 122 (not shown in FIG. 2) into which a game ball can enter, and the general winning opening 118, the first When a game ball enters the first start port 120 and the second start port 122, a predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player. The number of prize balls paid out based on the winning balls of the game ball may be different for each winning opening.

As will be described in detail later, a first starting area is provided in the first starting port 120, and a second starting area is provided in the second starting port 122. Then, when the game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122 and the game ball enters the first starting area or the second starting area, any one of a plurality of special symbols provided in advance is provided. A lottery is held to determine the special symbol of 1. Each special symbol is associated with various game benefits such as whether or not a player can execute a major role game that is advantageous to the player, and what kind of game state the subsequent game state should be. Therefore, when the game ball enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, the player obtains a predetermined prize ball and at the same time obtains an opportunity to acquire the right to receive various game benefits. It becomes.

The first starting port 120 is the lower part of the game area 116, and only the game balls flowing down the first game area 116a can enter, or the game balls that have entered the first game area 116a are better. , It is arranged at a position where it is easier to enter than the game ball which has entered the second game area 116b.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the second starting port 122 is located on the right side of the first starting port 120 and in the second gaming area 116b. Only the game ball flowing down the second game area 116b can enter the second start port 122, or the game ball that has entered the second game area 116b has entered the first game area 116a. It is located in a position that is easier to enter than the game ball. The second starting port 122 is configured by a variable starting winning device having a movable piece 122a, and the ease of entering the game ball into the second starting port 122 is variable. Specifically, the second starting port 122 is provided so that the movable piece 122a can be opened and closed, and when the movable piece 122a is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the second starting port 122. It has become. On the other hand, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 provided in the second game area 116b, a lottery of a normal symbol described later is performed, and when the winning is won by this lottery, the movable piece 122a is in an open state for a predetermined time. Is controlled by. In this way, when the movable piece 122a is opened, the movable piece 122a functions as a saucer for guiding the game ball to the second starting port 122, and the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 122.

Further, only the game ball flowing down the second game area 116b can enter the second game area 116b, or the game ball entering the second game area 116b is the first game area 116a. The first big winning opening 126 and the second big winning opening 128 are provided at positions where it is easier to enter than the game ball that has entered. Hereinafter, the first large winning opening 126 and the second large winning opening 128 are collectively referred to simply as the large winning opening. The opening / closing door 126a and the opening / closing door 126b are provided in the first large winning opening 126 so as to be openable and closable. Normally, the opening / closing door 126b closes the first large winning opening 126, making it impossible for the game ball to enter the first large winning opening 126. Further, the opening / closing door 126a is in a state of being lowered downward when the opening / closing door 126b closes the first winning opening 126 (see FIG. 2). As a result, when the game ball cannot enter the first prize opening 126, there is a space between the opening / closing door 126a and the opening / closing door 126b through which the game ball flowing down the second game area 116b can pass. Occurs. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned major game is executed, the opening / closing door 126b is opened, and the opening / closing door 126a stands up in a state of being inclined toward the opening / closing door 126b (see FIG. 3). A gap shorter than the diameter of the game ball is formed between the tip of the opening / closing door 126a and the tip of the opening / closing door 126b. Therefore, the opening / closing door 126a and the opening / closing door 126b function as a saucer, and the game ball flowing down the second game area 116b can enter the first large winning opening 126. Then, when the game ball enters the first prize opening 126, the predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player.

Further, the opening / closing door 128a of the second special winning opening 128 is provided so that the opening / closing door 128a can be opened / closed. Normally, the opening / closing door 128b closes the second large winning opening 128 to allow the game ball to enter the second large winning opening 128. It is impossible to enter the ball. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned big role game is executed, the opening / closing door 128a is opened, the opening / closing door 128a functions as a saucer, and the game ball can enter the second big winning opening 128. Then, when the game ball enters the second prize opening 128, the predetermined prize ball is paid out to the player. The number of prize balls paid out based on the entry of the game ball into the large winning opening may be different for each large winning opening.

In the first game area 116a, two general winning openings 118 are provided on the left side of the first starting opening 120. Further, in the second game area 116b, one general winning opening 118 is provided between the first large winning opening 126 and the second starting opening 122.

As shown in FIG. 3, the first game area 116a is provided with two discharge ports 130 that discharge the game ball from the game area 116 to the back side of the game board 108 with the two general winning ports 118 sandwiched between them. There is. One of the two outlets 130 is provided adjacent to the upper left of the general winning opening 118, and the other of the two outlets 130 is located at the lowermost center of the game area 116 (directly below the first starting port 120). It is provided. Further, in the second game area 116b, one discharge port 130 is provided below the general winning port 118. A game ball that did not enter any of the general winning opening 118, the first starting opening 120, the second starting opening 122, the first major winning opening 126, and the second major winning opening 128 due to the plurality of discharge ports 130. It is discharged from the game area 116 to the back side of the game board 108.

Then, in the game machine 100, as an effect device that performs an operation according to the effect while the game is in progress, the effect display device 200 composed of a liquid crystal display device, the effect accessory device 202 composed of a movable device, various lighting modes and light emission. An effect lighting device 204 composed of a color-controlled lamp, an audio output device 206 composed of a speaker, and an effect operation device 208 that accepts an input operation of a player are provided. In the present embodiment, the effect device is configured to be able to execute an operation corresponding to the progress of the game or the input operation of the effect operation device 208.

The effect display device (an example of a light emitting device) 200 is a backlight composed of an effect display unit 200a including an image display unit for displaying an image, a backlight which is a light source of the effect display unit 200a, and a control unit of the backlight. It is equipped with a unit (not shown). In the game machine 100, the effect display device 200 controls the brightness (specifically, the brightness of the effect display unit 200a) by the brightness control value. The brightness control value is, for example, a control value for adjusting the brightness of the backlight to control the brightness of the effect display unit 200a. In the present embodiment, the brightness control value is configured to be adjustable by the player. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, for example, the brightness control value can be adjusted by the player in seven stages of "1" to "7". As the brightness control value increases from "1" to "7", the effect display unit 200a emits light with higher brightness when displaying an image. The details of adjusting the brightness control value will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 3, the effect display device 200 arranges the effect display unit 200a so as to be visible from the front side of the game machine 100 at a substantially central portion of the game board 108. As shown in FIG. 3, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are variablely displayed on the effect display unit 200a, and the result of the large winning combination lottery is notified to the player depending on the stop display mode of each of the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c. The production will be executed.

The effect accessory device 202 is arranged in front of the effect display unit 200a and is normally retracted to the back side of the game board 108. However, during the variable display of the above effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c, the effect is produced. It is movable up to the front surface of the display unit 200a to give the player a feeling of expectation of a big hit.

The effect lighting device 204 is provided on the effect accessory device 202, the game board 108, and the like, and is variously controlled to be lit according to an image or the like displayed on the effect display unit 200a. The effect lighting device 204 has, for example, a full-color LED or the like. As an example, FIGS. 2 and 3 show two effect lighting devices 204 provided in the upper center of the game board 108 and the lower part of the second game area 116b, respectively.

The sound output device 206 is provided at an upper position of the front frame 106 and a lowermost position of the outer frame 102, and various sounds are directed toward the front side of the game machine 100 according to an image or the like displayed on the effect display unit 200a. Is output. In the game machine 100, the volume of the voice output device 206 is controlled by the volume control value. The volume control value is a control value for controlling the volume of the sound output from the speaker of the sound output device 206. In the present embodiment, the volume control value is configured to be adjustable by the player. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, for example, the volume control value can be adjusted by the player in seven stages of "1" to "7". As the volume control value increases from "1" to "7", the voice output device 206 outputs a larger voice. Details of adjusting the volume control value will be described later.

In the present embodiment, these effect devices are controlled by a plurality of operation modes (for example, a mode relating to whether or not to perform an operation according to an input operation of the effect operation device 208). The details of the operation mode will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 2, the effect operation device 208 receives an effect button 208a that accepts a player's pressing operation, an effect lever 208b that receives an input operation (for example, a pulling operation toward the front side) by the player, and an input of the effect lever 208b. It has a plurality of operating means of a rotating portion 208c that rotates with the operation and a cross button 218. The effect button 208a and the effect lever 208b correspond to an operation device that can be operated by the player. The effect operation device 208 is provided at a substantially central position in the width direction of the game machine 100 and at a position lower than the transmission plate 110 (see FIG. 1). The effect operation device 208 is activated during the operation valid period (for example, during standby or during execution of a predetermined effect), and when the player's operation is received within the operation valid period, various effects are executed according to the operation. To.

The game machine 100 includes a cross-shaped button 218 provided adjacent to the right side of the effect button 208a. The cross-shaped button 218 is composed of a cross-shaped key button including an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button that accepts a player's pressing operation. The cross-shaped button 218 is configured so that it can be pressed in each of the four directions of up, down, left, and right. The cross-shaped button 218 is mainly provided to perform a selection operation or the like on the menu screen displayed on the effect display unit 200a based on the fact that the effect button 208a is pressed within the operation valid period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cross-shaped button 209 is activated in accordance with the activation of the effect operation device 208.

Further, the game machine 100 includes an adjustment button 209 provided between the effect button 208a and the cross button. The adjustment button 209 includes a volume control button (an example of a volume control device) 209a and a light amount control button (an example of a brightness control device) 209b that accepts a player's pressing operation. The volume control button 209a is provided to adjust the volume of the sound output from the sound output device 206. Specifically, by operating the volume control button 209a, the volume control value is increased or decreased within a predetermined range (for example, 1 to 7), and the volume of the voice output from the voice output device 206 is adjusted. Further, the light amount adjusting button 209b is provided, for example, to adjust the light emission intensity of the effect display unit 200a. Specifically, by operating the light amount adjusting button 209b, the brightness control value is increased or decreased within a predetermined range (for example, 1 to 7), and the brightness of the effect display unit 200a is adjusted. Hereinafter, the operation of pressing each button (volume adjustment button 209a and light amount adjustment button 209b) of the adjustment button 209 to adjust the volume of the audio output device 206 and the brightness of the effect display unit 200a is referred to as an adjustment operation. That is, the game machine 100 includes a volume control button 209a capable of accepting a volume control value adjustment operation by the player, and a light amount adjustment button 209b capable of accepting a brightness control value adjustment operation by the player.

Each button of the adjustment button 209 is also activated during a predetermined operation validity period, similarly to the effect operation device 208. For example, when the volume control button 209a receives an operation of the player within the operation effective time, the volume of the voice output from the voice output device 206 is adjusted to a set value (volume control value) according to the operation. To. Further, for example, when the light amount adjusting button 209b receives an operation of the player within the operation effective time, the brightness of the effect display unit 200a is adjusted to a set value (luminance control value) according to the operation. In the present embodiment, does the effect device (audio output device 206, effect display device 200) capable of adjusting the output value by the player perform an operation corresponding to the adjustment operation of the plurality of adjustment modes (for example, the adjustment button 209)? It is controlled by the mode) related to whether or not. The details of the adjustment mode will be described later. That is, in the present embodiment, the voice output device 206 can execute the volume control operation of adjusting the volume based on the volume control value corresponding to the progress of the game or the control operation of the volume control button 209a. Further, the effect display device 200 can execute a brightness adjustment operation for adjusting the brightness of the effect display unit 200a based on the brightness control value corresponding to the progress of the game or the adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment button 209b.
The game machine 100 may be configured so that the light amount of the effect lighting device 204 can be adjusted by the adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment button 209b.

On the rear side (game board 108 side) of the effect operation device 208, a prize ball paid out from the game machine 100 and an upper plate 132 on which the game ball rented from the game ball lending device is guided are provided. When the upper plate 132 is filled with the game ball, the game ball is guided to the lower plate 134. Further, on the bottom surface of the lower plate 134, a ball extraction hole (not shown) for discharging the game ball from the lower plate 134 is formed. This ball pulling hole is normally closed by an opening / closing plate (not shown), but by sliding the ball pulling knob 134a in the left-right direction in the figure, the opening / closing plate slides integrally with the ball pulling knob 134a. However, it is possible to discharge the game ball below the lower plate 134 through the ball extraction hole.

Further, on the game board 108, the first special symbol display 160, the second special symbol display 162, and the first special symbol are held at a position outside the game area 116 and visible to the player. A display 164, a second special symbol hold display 166, a normal symbol display 168, a normal symbol hold display 170, and a right-handed notification display 172 are provided. Each of these indicators 160 to 172 is a device for displaying various situations related to the game, and the details thereof will be described later.

(Structure on the back of the game machine)
FIG. 4 is a back view of the game machine 100 with the back cover 302 removed. In FIG. 4, a performance indicator 300d among a plurality of components mounted on the main control board 300 and covered with the main control board case 311 is shown for easy understanding. FIG. 5 is a back view of the game machine 100 with the back cover 302 attached.

As shown in FIG. 4, on the back surface side of the game machine 100, a main control board case 311, a game information output terminal board 312, a prize ball storage tank 315, a prize ball payout flow path 317, a sub control board case 319, and a payout ball. A counting switch 316s, a back cover 302 (not shown in FIG. 4, see FIG. 5), a payout control board case 313, an inner frame opening switch 145s, and the like are installed. In addition to this, on the back side of the game machine 100, various electronic devices (including a control computer (not shown) constituting the power supply system and control system of the game machine 100, a power cord equipped with a power plug, connection wiring, etc. (Not shown) is installed.

In the center of the back surface side of the game machine 100, a main control board 300 that controls the basic operation of the game in the game machine 100 is housed in a main control board case (an example of a case member) 311 with a part exposed. There is. Details of the configuration of the main control board 300 will be described later. A part of the main control board 300 exposed from the main control board case 311 is provided with a set value operation unit 301 used for operations related to set values in which the degree of advantage is set stepwise. The setting value operation unit 301 has a RAM clear button 305 and a setting key insertion port 306 arranged adjacent to the RAM clear button 305. The RAM clear button 305 is used not only for operations related to set values, but also for initialization of the main RAM 300c (not shown in FIG. 4) provided on the main control board 300. On the other hand, the setting key insertion port 306 is used only for operations related to the set value such as changing and referencing the set value. The details of the set value operation unit 301 will be described later. Further, a part of the main control board 300 exposed from the main control board case 311 is input to electronic components such as the main CPU 300a (not shown in FIG. 4) mounted on the main control board 300 in addition to the set value operation unit 301. An electronic connector is provided to which a predetermined signal or electric power is supplied.

A sub-control board case 319 is arranged above the main control board case 311. The sub-control board case 319 is housed in the sub-control board case 319 with a part of the sub-control board 330 that mainly controls each effect such as during a game or during standby being exposed. A part of the sub-control board 330 exposed from the sub-control board case 319 is provided with an electronic connector or the like to which a predetermined signal input to an electronic component such as the sub CPU 330a mounted on the sub-control board 330 or power is supplied. There is.

The game information output terminal plate 312 is connected to an external electronic device (for example, a data display device, a hall computer, etc.) of the game machine 100. Various external information signals (for example, prize ball information, error information, jackpot information, start port information, etc.) indicating the game progress state, maintenance state, etc. of the game machine 100 are directed from the game information output terminal board 312 to an external electronic device. Is output.

The prize ball storage tank 315 can store game balls replenished from a replenishment route (not shown). When the prize balls are paid out, the game balls stored in the prize ball storage tank 315 are guided to the upper plate 132 (see FIG. 2) on the front side of the game machine 100 through the prize ball payout flow path 317. Be taken. The payout ball counting switch 316s detects the number of game balls to be paid out through the prize ball payout flow path 317.

The payout control board case 313 is a case member containing a payout control board 310 that controls for launching the game ball and for paying out the prize ball. Details of the sub-control board 330 and the payout control board 310 will be described later.

An inner frame opening switch 145s is provided in the lower left region of the payout control board case 313. The inner frame opening switch 145s will be described later. Further, the power cord (not shown) is connected to, for example, a power supply device (for example, AC24V) installed in an island facility of a game store. As a result, the power supply (electric power) required for the operation of the game machine 100 is secured.

As shown in FIG. 5, the game machine 100 has a back cover (an example of a cover member) 302 provided by covering the main control board 300 (both not shown in FIG. 5, see FIG. 4) together with the main control board case 311. It has. Further, the back cover 302 is provided so as to cover the sub-control board 330 (both not shown in FIG. 5, see FIG. 4) together with the sub-control board case 319. The back cover 302 is a cover member that covers the main control board case 311 and the sub control board case 319 so that the main control board 300 and the sub control board 330 cannot be easily touched. The back cover 302 is detachably attached to the back side of the game machine 100.

The game machine 100 has at least a movable cover (an example of the movable cover unit) 309 that covers the set value operation unit 301 so as to be exposed when the set value operation unit 301 (not shown in FIG. 5, see FIG. 4) is operated. I have. The back cover 302 is formed with an opening 321 arranged so as to surround the set value operation unit 301. The movable cover 309 is attached to the place where the opening 321 is formed. As a result, the movable cover 309 is provided on the back cover 302 at a position corresponding to the set value operation unit 301. The movable cover 309 is rotatably attached to the back cover 302 with the shaft portion 392L provided at the upper left corner and the shaft portion 392R provided at the upper right corner as rotation axes. The movable cover 309 has a size capable of covering the opening 321 formed in the back cover 302. Therefore, when the movable cover 309 is in the closed state (closed state), the movable cover 309 is arranged behind the set value operation unit 301 as shown in FIG. As a result, the set value operation unit 301 cannot be touched. On the other hand, when the movable cover 309 is in an open state (open state) by being rotated around the shaft portions 392L and 392R of the movable cover 309 as a rotation axis, the movable cover 309 is retracted from the rear side of the set value operation unit 301 (not shown). Is omitted). As a result, the set value operating unit 301 is exposed in the opening 321 of the back cover 302, so that the set value operating unit 301 can be operated through the opening 321. Therefore, since the operator can touch the set value operation unit 301, he / she can perform an operation related to the set value. Details will be described later, but the operations related to the set value include an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value.

(Structure of main control board)
A performance indicator 300d is provided in the upper left region on the main control board 300. The performance display 300d in this embodiment is composed of a 7-segment LED display with four decimal points. Specifically, the performance display 300d has four display areas 361, 362, 363, 364. A number (counter value) is associated with each segment constituting the 7-segment LED display in the display areas 361 to 364. The display areas 361 to 364 can display numbers and alphabets by controlling the lighting of each segment corresponding to the counter value.
Therefore, the performance display 300d can display up to four alphanumeric characters. The performance display 300d having four display areas 361, 362, 363, 364 displays a value (for example, a base value, etc.) of a calculation processing result based on a set value and the number of prize balls, which will be described later.

The performance display 300d is not limited to the position shown in FIG. 4, as long as a person (police officer, etc.) who confirms the base value can confirm the displayed content without misunderstanding, and the other configuration of the main control board 300 on the main control board 300. It may be provided at a position where it can be easily confirmed so as not to overlap with the above. The main control board case 103 is made of a transparent material (for example, polycarbonate) so that the main control board 300 housed inside can be visually recognized from the outside.

The main IC 300x is arranged below the performance display 300d. The main IC 300x is, for example, a V5 chip, and incorporates a main CPU 300a, a main ROM 300b, and a main RAM 300c (not shown in FIG. 4, see FIG. 6). Based on the input signals from each detection switch and timer, the main CPU 300a reads the program stored in the main ROM 300b and performs arithmetic processing, directly controls each device and display, or produces the result of arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly. Further, the main RAM 300c functions as a data work area during arithmetic processing of the main CPU 300a.

A RAM clear button 305 is provided at the lower left portion of the main control board 300. The RAM clear button 305 is arranged so as to be exposed to the outside from the main control board case 103 so that the RAM clear button 305 can be operated with the main control board case 103 sealed. When the RAM clear button 305 is pressed, the RAM clear detection switch 305s (see FIG. 6) detects the pressing operation of the RAM clear button 305, and a RAM clear signal is output. The RAM clear signal is used, for example, to determine whether or not the main CPU 300a initializes the main RAM 300c when the power is turned on.

(Setting key operation)
The main control board 300 is provided with a setting key insertion port 306 in addition to the RAM clear button 305. The setting key insertion port 306 is an insertion port (keyhole) for inserting a dedicated key (setting key) used for changing a setting value or referencing the setting value, which will be described later. The game machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured so that the set value can be set in 6 stages of 1 to 6 by pressing the RAM clear button 305 together with the operation of the setting key. As will be described in detail later, in the game machine 100, the game progresses according to the set value being set, and the degree of advantage differs depending on the set value.

The setting key insertion port 306 is composed of a cylinder lock having a cylinder. Further, the cylinder of the setting key insertion port 306 is provided in a state of penetrating the main control board case 103 (a state in which the periphery of the cylinder is surrounded by the main control board case 103). Therefore, it is possible to insert the setting key into the setting key insertion port 306 and perform the rotation operation while the main control board 300 is sealed in the main control board case 103.

(Internal configuration of control means)
FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of a control means for controlling the progress of the game.

The main control board 300 controls the basic operation of the game. The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 300a, a main ROM 300b, and a main RAM 300c. Based on the input signals from each detection switch and timer, the main CPU 300a reads the program stored in the main ROM 300b and performs arithmetic processing, directly controls each device and display, or produces the result of arithmetic processing. Send commands to other boards accordingly. Further, the main CPU 300a uses the main RAM 300c and the internal register (not shown) of the main CPU 300a as a data work area at the time of arithmetic processing.

Here, among the memory areas used by the main CPU 300a as the work area, application examples of the memory areas (F000H to F3FFH) allocated to the main RAM 300c will be described with reference to FIG. 7.
As shown in FIG. 7, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the areas of the addresses F000H to F1FFH are divided into four areas from the first area to the fourth area according to the type of data to be stored. The first area is an area for storing information related to the set value (information related to the set value) and information related to the game state (information related to the game state). The second area is an area for storing checksum-related information and backup-related information used for error detection related to power recovery in the initialization process of the main CPU 300a. The third area is an area for storing error-related information and the first normal game state information. The fourth area is an area for storing the second normal game information and an area used as a stack area.
The areas of addresses F000H to F1FFH including the first to fourth areas are referred to as used areas. The used area is a memory area for storing information (data) essential for the progress of the game machine, and the used capacity is limited by the game rules.

In the main RAM 300c, the areas of addresses F300H to F3FFH are areas used for storing information that is not essential for the progress of the game, and are referred to as unused areas. In this example, information (performance display-related information) related to display control and the like of the performance display 300d is stored in the non-use area. In addition, information related to output control of the test signal may be stored in the non-use area. The test signal is the current internal state of the game machine 100 (for example, special game management phase, normal game management phase, launch position designation state, execution status of major game, game state (high probability, low probability, time reduction, non-time reduction). ) Etc.) is a signal output to notify the outside of the main control board 300 immediately (in real time).

Further, as shown in FIG. 7, the area between the used area and the unused area (the area of addresses F200H to F2FF) is an unused area that is not used for storing data.
As described above, in the game machine 100, the main RAM 300c is composed of a used area, an unused area, and an unused area. In this example, the main RAM 300c is assigned an address value for each byte area. Therefore, an area corresponding to 256 bytes is allocated as an unused area. As the unused area, an area of at least 16 bytes or more may be allocated.

Returning to FIG. 6, the games executed by the game machine 100 of the present embodiment mainly include a special game started by entering the game ball into the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, and the gate 124. It is roughly divided into a normal game that is started when a game ball passes through. The main ROM 300b of the main control board 300 stores various programs for advancing special games and normal games, as well as data and tables required for various games.

The main control board 300 has a general winning opening detection switch 118s for detecting that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 118, and a first starting port for detecting that a game ball has entered the first starting port 120. Detection switch 120s, second start port detection switch 122s for detecting that a game ball has entered the second start port 122, gate detection switch 124s for detecting that a game ball has passed through the gate 124, first prize opening The first large winning opening detection switch 126s that detects that a game ball has entered the 126, and the second large winning opening detection switch 128s that detects that a game ball has entered the second large winning opening 128 are connected. A detection signal is input to the main control board 300 from each of these detection switches.

Further, the main control board 300 opens and closes the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 122c that operates the movable piece 122b of the second starting port 122, the opening / closing door solenoid 126c1 that operates the opening / closing door 126a, and the first special winning opening 126. The first special winning opening solenoid 126c2 that operates the opening / closing door 126b and the second special winning opening solenoid 128c that operates the opening / closing door 128b that opens / closes the second special winning opening 128 are connected by the main control board 300. , The opening / closing control of the second starting port 122, the first large winning opening 126, and the second large winning opening 128 is performed.

Further, the main control board 300 includes a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol hold indicator 164, a second special symbol hold indicator 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol display. The symbol hold indicator 170 and the right-handed notification indicator 172 are connected to each other, and the display control of each of these indicators is performed by the main control board 300.

Further, the front frame opening switch 141s, the out detection switch 143s, and the inner frame opening switch 145s are connected to the game machine 100. Hereinafter, the inner frame opening switch 145s and the front frame opening switch 141s may be collectively referred to as an opening / closing frame member opening switch. The opening / closing frame member release switch is a switch that detects that the opening / closing frame member such as the inner frame 104 or the front frame 106 is open in the game machine 100.

When the front frame opening switch 141s detects that the front frame 106 is open, the front frame opening switch 141s outputs an opening detection signal (on signal) to the main control board 300. Further, when the inner frame opening switch 145s detects that the inner frame 104 is open to the outer frame 102, the inner frame opening switch 145s outputs an opening detection signal (on signal) to the main control board 300.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 6, in addition to the opening / closing frame member release switch, the game machine 100 detects that there is an abnormality in each configuration of the game machine 100 or a possibility of fraud for each configuration. An abnormality detection switch may be provided. For example, the game machine 100 may be provided with a radio wave detection switch for detecting radio waves, a magnetic detection switch for detecting magnetism, and the like as abnormality detection switches.

When the out detection switch 143s detects that the game ball launched into the game area 116 has passed through the game ball discharge path (not shown) that is passed when the game ball is discharged to the outside of the game machine 100, the out detection switch 143s is connected to the main control board 300. Outputs an out-ball detection signal (on signal).
A game ball that has entered any of the general winning openings 118, the first starting opening 120, the second starting opening 122, the first major winning opening 126, and the second major winning opening 128, and any of the winning openings. The game ball that has entered the discharge port 130 without passing through the above-mentioned game machine ball discharge path. That is, all the game balls that are aggregated and discharged to the outside after being launched into the game area 116 are detected by the out detection switch 143s in the game ball discharge path.

Further, a setting key switch 180s and a RAM clear detection switch 305s are provided on the back surface of the game board 108. The setting key switch 180s is configured to be accessible by the setting key described above. When the setting key switch 180s detects the rotation operation of the setting key inserted into the setting key insertion port 306, the setting key rotation detection signal (on signal) indicating the state of the rotation operation (rotation state) is sent to the main control board 300. Output.

Further, the RAM clear detection switch 305s is configured to be accessible by pressing the RAM clear button 305. When the RAM clear detection switch 305s detects that the RAM clear button 305 is pressed (pressing operation), the RAM clear detection switch 305s outputs a pressing detection signal (on signal) to the main control board 300.

The game machine 100 according to the present embodiment can change the set value by using the setting key and the RAM clear button 305 that can access the setting key switch 180s.
Here, the procedure for changing the set value will be described.

(Procedure for changing setting values)
The procedure of the operation for changing the setting value among the operations related to the setting value will be described.
First, in a state where the power of the game machine 100 is not turned on (power is turned off), the operator who changes the setting opens the inner frame 104 with respect to the outer frame 102 by using a dedicated key. As a result, the components such as the main control board 300 arranged on the back surface of the game machine 100 become visible.
As described above, the back surface of the game machine 100 is provided with a setting key insertion slot 306 for inserting the setting key and a RAM clear button 305 (see FIG. 4). The operator inserts the setting key into the setting key insertion port 306, and rotates (changes) the setting key in one direction (for example, clockwise direction). By the change operation, for example, the setting key insertion port 306, which is normally oriented vertically, is oriented horizontally. Further, the operator presses the RAM clear button 305.

Next, the operator turns on the game machine 100 while rotating the setting key and pressing the RAM clear button 305.
When the power is turned on, the inner frame opening switch 145s detects that the inner frame 104 is open to the outer frame 102, and the opening detection signal (on signal) is input to the main control board 300. Further, the setting key switch 180s detects that the setting key insertion port 306 is turned sideways due to the change operation in which the setting key is rotated clockwise when the power is turned on, and the setting key rotation detection signal (on signal) is mainly used. It is input to the control board 300. Further, it is detected by the RAM clear detection switch 305s that the RAM clear button is pressed by turning on the power, and the press detection signal (ON signal) is input to the main control board 300. The game machine 100 can change (switch) the set value based on the on signal being input to the main control board 300 by the inner frame opening switch 145s, the setting key switch 180s, and the RAM clear detection switch 305s. The setting is changed).

The operator changes the set value to any one of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages) by pressing the RAM clear button 305 any number of times in the setting change state and accessing the RAM clear detection switch 305s. be able to. At this time, the set value is displayed in the display area 361-364 of the performance display 300d, for example.

When the operator changes the set value to an arbitrary value, the setting key rotated clockwise at the time of the change operation is rotated counterclockwise to return to the original position (return operation). When the setting key switch 180s detects that the setting key insertion port 306, which had been turned horizontally by the change operation, returns to the vertical direction by the return operation and the setting key has returned to the original position, a signal indicating the detection is detected. (Off signal) is input to the main control board 300 from the setting key switch 180s. The main control board 300 confirms the change of the set value based on the input of the off signal. The setting key switch 180s periodically outputs a setting key rotation detection signal (on signal) to the main control board 300 based on the detection of the rotation operation, and outputs the on signal until the return operation is detected. If it continues and the return operation is detected, the output of the setting key rotation detection signal (ON signal) to the main control board 300 may be stopped. In this case, the main control board 300 may confirm the change of the set value based on the fact that the input of the on signal is stopped.

When the change of the set value is confirmed and the operator pulls out the setting key from the setting key insertion port 306, the set value displayed on the performance display 300d is erased and the display of the set value ends (the set value is changed). It will be hidden). Finally, the operator closes the inner frame 104 of the game machine 100 and locks it with a dedicated key. This completes the setting change work. When the setting change work is completed, the normal game is started.

Although the details will be described later, when the set value is changed, the main CPU 300a of the main control board 300 sets the changed set value to a predetermined area of the main RAM 300c (for example, the first area among the used areas to be backed up). ). As a result, it is possible to refer to the set value being set during the game.

In this way, the game machine 100 detects the change operation of the setting key in the setting key switch 180s (setting key ON) when the power is turned on, and the inner frame 104 is released in the inner frame opening switch 145s (inner frame open state). ), And when it is detected that the RAM clear button 305 is pressed by the RAM clear detection switch 305s (RAM clear pressed state), the setting change state (setting change mode) is set.
In the setting change state, the indicators 160 to 172 that display information on the special game, the normal game, and the like are not displayed, and the normal game such as the launch of the game ball and the prize ball of the game ball cannot be performed. In the setting change state, each display 160 to 172 may maintain the off state, or maintain a dedicated (specific) lighting pattern in the setting change state and display different from the normal display. It may be an embodiment.

(Setting confirmation status)
Although the change of the set value has been described above, the game machine 100 can confirm the set value currently being set without changing the set value.
Specifically, when the power is turned on to the game machine 100 without pressing the RAM clear button 305 in the state where the setting key is changed (rotated in the clockwise direction) in the above setting changing procedure, the setting is currently being performed. It becomes a state where the setting value of can be confirmed (setting confirmation state).

That is, when the power is turned on, the game machine 100 detects the change operation of the setting key with the setting key switch 180s (setting key ON), and releases the inner frame 104 images with the inner frame opening switch 145s (inner frame open state). When it is detected and the RAM clear button 305 is not detected by the RAM clear detection switch 305s (RAM clear not pressed state), the setting confirmation state (setting confirmation mode) is set.
Similar to the setting change state, in the setting confirmation state, the indicators 160 to 172 are not displayed, and normal games such as launching a game ball and a prize ball of a game ball cannot be performed. In the setting confirmation state, each display 160 to 172 may maintain the off state, or maintain a dedicated (specific) lighting pattern during the setting confirmation and display mode different from the normal display. It may be. Further, in the setting confirmation state, each display 160 to 172 may maintain a dedicated (specific) lighting pattern and have a display mode different from the setting change state.

As shown in FIG. 6, the payout control board 310 and the sub control board 330 are connected to the main control board 300.

The payout control board 310 controls for firing the game ball and controls for paying out the prize ball. The payout control board 310 also includes a CPU, a ROM, and a RAM, and is connected to the main control board 300 so as to be able to communicate in both directions. A game information output terminal board 312 is connected to the payout control board 310, and various information on the game progress output from the main control board 300 is transmitted via the payout control board 310 and the game information output terminal board 312. It will be output to the hall computer of the amusement store.

Further, a payout motor 314 for paying out the game balls stored in the storage unit to the player as prize balls is connected to the payout control board 310. The payout control board 310 controls the payout motor 314 based on the payout number designation command transmitted from the main control board 300 to control the player to pay out a predetermined prize ball. At this time, the payout of the game balls is detected by the payout detection switch 315s, the number of game balls paid out is detected by the payout ball counting switch 316s, and it is grasped whether the prize balls to be paid out are paid out to the player. It has become. Each time the prize ball is actually paid out by driving the payout motor 314, the detection signal from the payout detection switch 315s and the count signal from the payout ball counting switch 316s are input to the payout control board 310.

Further, a plate full tank detection switch 318s for detecting the full tank state of the lower plate 134 is connected to the payout control board 310. The plate full tank detection switch 318s is provided in a passage that guides the game ball to be paid out as a prize ball to the lower plate 134, and each time the game ball passes through the passage, a game ball detection signal is input to the payout control board 310. It is supposed to be done.

Then, when a predetermined amount or more of the game balls are stored in the lower plate 134 and the tank is full, the game balls stay in the passage toward the lower plate 134, and the plate full tank detection switch 318s is directed toward the payout control board 310. , The game ball detection signal is continuously input. When the game ball detection signal is continuously input for a predetermined time, the payout control board 310 determines that the lower plate 134 is in a full tank state, and transmits a plate full tank command to the main control board 300. On the other hand, if the continuous input of the game ball detection signal is interrupted after the dish full tank command is transmitted, it is determined that the full tank state has been released, and the dish full tank release command is transmitted to the main control board 300.

Further, the launch control board 320 is bidirectionally connected to the payout control board 310 so as to be communicable. When the launch control board 320 receives the launch control data from the payout control board 310, the launch control board 320 permits the launch. The launch control board 320 is provided on the operation handle 112, and is connected to a touch sensor 112s that detects that the player touches the operation handle 112 and an operation volume 112a that detects the operation angle of the operation handle 112. .. Then, when a signal is input from the touch sensor 112s and the operation volume 112a, the launch control board 320 controls to energize the launch solenoid 112c provided in the game ball launcher to launch the game ball.

The sub-control board 330 mainly controls each effect such as during a game or during standby. The sub control board 330 includes a sub CPU 330a, a sub ROM 330b, a sub RAM 330c, an image control unit 340, a voice control unit 350, a lighting control unit 360, and a movable body control unit 370. The sub CPU 330a, the image control unit 340, the voice control unit 350, the lighting control unit 360, and the movable body control unit 370 may each be configured by individual circuits. Further, at least two or more of the sub CPU 330a, the image control unit 340, the voice control unit 350, the lighting control unit 360, and the movable body control unit 370 are configured by one circuit (for example, one package or one chip). It may be configured as a functional block of the circuit.

The sub-control board 330 is unidirectionally connected to the main control board 300 from the main control board 300 to the sub-control board 330 so as to be communicable. Based on the command transmitted from the main control board 300, the input signal from the timer, and the like, the sub CPU 330a reads the program stored in the sub ROM 330b, performs arithmetic processing, and displays a command for executing the effect as an image. It transmits to at least one of the control unit 340, the voice control unit 350, the lighting control unit 360, and the movable body control unit 370. At this time, the sub RAM 330c functions as a data work area during the arithmetic processing of the sub CPU 330a.

The image control unit 340 performs image display control for displaying an image on the effect display unit 200a of the effect display device 200, and includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, and a VRAM. The ROM of the image control unit 340 stores a large amount of image data such as a design and a background displayed on the effect display unit 200a, and the CPU outputs the image data based on the command transmitted from the sub-control board 330. The image display of the effect display unit 200a is controlled by reading from the ROM to the VRAM.

The voice control unit 350 performs voice output control for outputting voice from the voice output device 206 based on a command transmitted from the sub-control board 330. Further, the lighting control unit 360 performs lighting control for lighting the effect lighting device 204 based on a command transmitted from the sub-control board 330. The movable body control unit 370 can move the effect accessory device 202 or move the effect button 208a of the effect operation device 208 to the player side based on the command transmitted from the sub-control board 330. Control the operation. Further, when the detection signal indicating the movable state (for example, the movable position) of the effect accessory device 202 is input, the movable body control unit 370 transmits a predetermined command or control signal to the sub-control board 330.

Further, the movable body control unit 370 has a button operation detection switch 208s1 for detecting that the effect button 208a has been pressed, or a lever operation detection switch 208s2 for detecting that the effect lever 208b of the effect operation device 208 has been input-operated. When an operation detection signal is input from the cross-shaped button operation detection switch 218s that detects that the cross-shaped button 218 has been pressed, a predetermined command or control signal is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. Further, the movable body control unit 370 is operated from the volume button operation detection switch 209s1 for detecting that the volume control button 209a is pressed, and the light amount button operation detection switch 209s2 for detecting that the light amount adjustment button 209b is pressed. When the detection signal is input, a predetermined command or control signal is transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

A power supply board (not shown) is connected to each board, and power is supplied to each board from a commercial power source via the power supply board. Further, the power supply board is provided with a backup power supply composed of a capacitor.

Next, the game in the game machine 100 of the present embodiment will be described together with various tables stored in the main ROM 300b.

As described above, in the game machine 100 of the present embodiment, two types of games, a special game and a normal game, proceed in parallel, and a low-probability game state is defined as a game state when both of these games are performed. Alternatively, the game proceeds in any of the gaming states in which any of the high-probability gaming states and the non-time-saving gaming state or the time-saving gaming state are combined.

The details of each game state will be described later, but in the low-probability game state, the probability of acquiring the right to execute the big role game in which the first prize opening 126 and the second prize opening 128 are opened is set low. It is a gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state is a gaming state in which the probability of acquiring the right to execute a major role game is set high.

Further, the non-time-saving game state is a game state in which the movable piece 122b is unlikely to be opened and the game ball is difficult to enter the second starting port 122, and the time-saving game state is compared to the non-time-saving game state. However, the movable piece 122b is likely to be in the open state, and the game ball is likely to enter the second starting port 122. The initial state of the gaming machine 100 is set to a low-probability gaming state and a non-time-saving gaming state, and this gaming state is referred to as a normal gaming state in the present embodiment.

When the player operates the operation handle 112 to launch the game ball into the game area 116 and the game ball flowing down the game area 116 enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, the player is allowed to play the game. A lottery for whether or not to give a profit (hereinafter referred to as a "major role lottery") is held. In this big role lottery, if a big hit is won, the first big winning opening 126 (or the second big winning opening 128) is opened and the game ball to the first big winning opening 126 (or the second big winning opening 128) A large role game that enables entry into a ball is executed, and the game state after the end of the large role game is set to any of the above game states. The major role lottery method will be described below.

As will be described in detail later, when a game ball enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, various random numbers (big hit determination random numbers, hit symbol random numbers, etc.) used for the big win lottery will be triggered by this entry. Random numbers (reach group determined random numbers, reach mode determined random numbers, fluctuation pattern random numbers) are acquired, and each of these random numbers is stored in the special figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c. In the following, various random numbers stored in the special figure hold storage area when the game ball enters the first start port 120 are collectively referred to as special 1 hold, and the game ball enters the second start port 122. The various random numbers stored in the special figure hold storage area are collectively called special 2 hold.

The special figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c includes a first special figure reservation storage area and a second special figure reservation storage area. The first special figure reserved storage area and the second special figure reserved storage area each have four storage units (first to fourth storage units). Then, when the game ball enters the first start port 120, the special 1 hold is stored in order from the first storage unit of the first special figure hold storage area, and when the game ball enters the second start port 122, the special 1 hold is stored. 2 Holds are stored in order from the first storage unit of the second special figure hold storage area.

For example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120, if the hold is not stored in any of the first to fourth storage units of the first special figure hold storage area, the first storage unit is used. Special 1 Hold is memorized. Further, for example, when a game ball enters the first starting port 120 in a state where the special 1 hold is stored in the first storage unit to the third storage unit, the special 1 hold is set to the fourth storage unit. Remember. Further, even when the game ball enters the second starting port 122, the special 2 hold is stored in the 1st to 4th storage units of the 2nd special figure hold storage area in the same manner as described above. Special 2 hold is stored in the storage unit with the smallest number (ordinal number).

However, the number of special 1 hold (X1) and the number of special 2 hold (X2) that can be stored in the first special figure hold storage area and the second special figure hold storage area are set to four, respectively. Therefore, for example, when the game ball enters the first starting port 120, if four special 1 holdings are already stored in the first special figure holding storage area, the first starting port 120 is entered. No new special 1 hold is memorized by entering the game ball. Similarly, when the game ball enters the second starting port 122, if four special 2 holdings are already stored in the second special figure holding storage area, the game to the second starting port 122 is played. No new special 2 hold is memorized by entering the ball.

Next, the jackpot determination table used for the big winning combination lottery in the game machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 and 9.
FIG. 8 is a diagram for explaining a low-accuracy jackpot determination table, and FIG. 9 is a diagram for explaining a high-accuracy jackpot determination table. In the game machine 100, when a game ball enters the first start port 120 or the second start port 122, one jackpot determination random number is acquired from the comparison numerical range of 0 to 65535. Then, when the big win lottery is started, that is, the game state at the time of determining the big hit, and the big hit judgment table (comparative numerical range used for the big hit judgment) are selected according to the set value being set, and the selection is made. A big win lottery is performed by the big hit judgment table and the acquired big hit determination random number.

When starting the big win lottery for the special 1 hold and the special 2 hold in the low-probability game state, the low-probability jackpot determination tables shown in FIGS. 8 (a) to 8 (f) are referred to. Here, in the present embodiment, a set value in which the degree of advantage is set in stages (six stages in the present embodiment) is provided, and a low probability jackpot determination table is provided for each set value. During the game, the set value is set to one of the six stages, and the big win lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination table corresponding to the currently set set value.

In the low-probability gaming state, when the set value = 1 is set, the big winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low-probability jackpot determination table a shown in FIG. 8A. According to the low probability jackpot determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10218, it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/300.

When the set value = 2 is set, the big winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination table b shown in FIG. 8 (b). According to the low probability jackpot determination table b, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10243, it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/270.

When the set value = 3 is set, the big winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination table c shown in FIG. 8 (c). According to the low probability jackpot determination table c, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10273, it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/240.

When the set value = 4 is set, the big winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination table d shown in FIG. 8D. According to the low probability jackpot determination table d, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10312, it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/210.

When the set value = 5, the big winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination table e shown in FIG. 8 (e). According to the low probability jackpot determination table e, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10364, it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/180.

When the set value = 6, the big winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the low probability jackpot determination table f shown in FIG. 8 (f). According to the low probability jackpot determination table f, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10437, it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/150.

Further, in the high-probability gaming state, when starting the big win lottery for the special 1 hold and the special 2 hold, the high-probability jackpot determination table shown in FIGS. 9 (a) to 9 (f) is referred to. Here, in the present embodiment, a high-accuracy jackpot determination table is provided for each set value as in the low-accuracy jackpot determination table. Therefore, in the high-probability gaming state, the jackpot is determined by referring to the high-probability jackpot determination table (comparative numerical range used for jackpot determination) corresponding to the currently set set value.

In the high-probability gaming state, when the set value = 1 is set, the big winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the high-probability jackpot determination table a shown in FIG. 9A. According to the high-accuracy jackpot determination table a, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10655, it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/100.

When the set value = 2 is set, the big winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the high-accuracy jackpot determination table b shown in FIG. 9B. According to the jackpot determination table b at the time of high accuracy, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10728, it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/90.

When the set value = 3 is set, the big winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the high-accuracy jackpot determination table c shown in FIG. 9 (c). According to the jackpot determination table c at the time of high accuracy, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10819, it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/80.

When the set value = 4 is set, the big winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the high-accuracy jackpot determination table d shown in FIG. 9D. According to the high-accuracy jackpot determination table d, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 10936, it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/70.

When the set value = 5, a big winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the high-accuracy jackpot determination table e shown in FIG. 9 (e). According to the high-accuracy jackpot determination table e, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 11092, it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/60.

When the set value = 6, the big winning combination lottery is performed with reference to the high-accuracy jackpot determination table f shown in FIG. 9 (f). According to the high-accuracy jackpot determination table f, when the jackpot determination random number is 10001 to 11310, it is determined to be a jackpot. Therefore, the jackpot probability in this case is about 1/50.

As described above, regardless of whether the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment is set to the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability state, a large winning combination lottery is performed according to the set value being set. In the big win lottery in the present embodiment, the jackpot winning probability differs depending on the above-mentioned set value, and it is easier to win the jackpot when the set value is high than when it is low. Further, in the present embodiment, the lower limit value of the comparison numerical range (numerical range to be compared with the jackpot determination random number) in the jackpot determination table is the same value (10001). As a result, the game machine 100 can streamline the control processing procedure related to the jackpot determination at the time of the big winning combination lottery. The control processing procedure for jackpot determination will be described later.

Further, in the game machine 100, when the game machine 100 is in the high probability game state, the jackpot winning probability is higher than in the case where the game machine 100 is in the low probability game state. Further, although the jackpot winning probability is configured to be different for each set value here, the jackpot winning probability in either the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state may be common to all the set values.
Further, FIG. 8 shows an example in which a low-accuracy jackpot determination table is provided for each set value. For example, in the storage area of the game machine 100 (for example, the main ROM 300b), the low-accuracy jackpot determination table is provided for each setting. It may be configured as one table that defines different comparative numerical ranges. Similarly, the high-accuracy jackpot determination table may be configured as one table that defines a different comparison numerical range for each setting.

Further, in the high-probability gaming state, the jackpot winning probability is higher than in the low-probability gaming state. Here, the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state is common to all the set values, but the jackpot winning probability in the high-probability gaming state may be different for each set value. Even in this case, the winning range of the jackpot decision random number that wins the jackpot at the relatively low setting value is included in the winning range of the jackpot decision random number that wins the jackpot at the relatively high setting value. It suffices if the winning range of the big hit determination random number to win the big hit is set.

FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating a winning symbol random number determination table. When a game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one winning symbol random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the determination result of "big hit" is derived by the above-mentioned big role lottery, the type of the special symbol is determined by the acquired winning symbol random number and the winning symbol random number determination table. At this time, when the "big hit" is won by the special 1 hold, the symbol random number determination table for the special 1 is selected as shown in FIG. 10 (a), and the "big hit" is won by the special 2 hold. As shown in FIG. 10B, a symbol random number determination table for special 2 is selected. In the following, the special symbol determined by the hit symbol random number, that is, the special symbol determined when the jackpot judgment result is obtained is called the jackpot symbol, and the special symbol determined when the loss judgment result is obtained. The design is called a lost design.

According to the special 1 per symbol random number determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a) and the special 2 per symbol random number determination table shown in FIG. 10 (b), as shown in the figure, according to the acquired values of the per symbol random numbers. The type of special symbol (big hit symbol) is determined. In addition, if the result of the big role lottery is "missing" and the lottery result is derived by holding special 1, special symbol X is determined as the losing symbol without performing lottery, and the lottery result is special 2. When it is derived by holding, the special symbol Y is determined as the lost symbol without performing a lottery. That is, the winning symbol random number determination table is referred only when the big winning lottery result is "big hit", and is not referred to when the big winning lottery result is "missing".

FIG. 11 is a diagram illustrating a reach group determination random number determination table. A plurality of reach group determination random number determination tables are provided, and one table is selected according to the hold type, the number of holds, and the fluctuation state set in association with the game state. When the game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one reach group determination random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 10066. As described above, when the major winning combination lottery result is derived, a process of determining a variable effect pattern for notifying the major winning combination lottery result is performed. In the present embodiment, when the result of the large winning combination lottery is "missing", the group type is first determined by the reach group determination random number and the reach group determination random number determination table in determining the variation effect pattern.

For example, when the game state is set to the non-time saving game state and the fluctuation state is normally set to 1 fluctuation state, when the big role lottery result of "loss" is derived based on the special 1 hold, If the number of special 1 holdings (hereinafter, simply referred to as “holding number”) at the time of performing the big winning combination lottery is 0, the reach group determination random number determination table 1 is selected as shown in FIG. 11A. Similarly, if the number of holds is 1, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), the reach group determination random number determination table 2 is selected, and if the number of holds is 2, or 3, as shown in FIG. 11 (c). As shown, the reach group determination random number determination table 3 is selected. In FIG. 11, the group x described in the group type column indicates an arbitrary group number. Therefore, various group numbers are determined as the group type according to the acquired reach group determination random number and the type of the reach group determination random number determination table to be referred to.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the table for determining the variation effect pattern is determined based on the variation state in addition to the set gaming state. That is, the variable state is a concept in which the table to be referred to to determine the variable effect pattern is defined, and is set separately from the game state.

If the result of the big role lottery is "big hit", the group type is not decided when the variable effect pattern is decided. That is, the reach group determination random number determination table is referred only when the big win lottery result is "miss", and is not referred to when the big win lottery result is "big hit".

FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a reach mode determination random number determination table. This reach mode determination random number determination table is selected when the big role lottery result is "miss", and the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of loss, and the big hit selected when the big role lottery result is "big hit". It is roughly divided into the time reach mode determination random number judgment table. The reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of loss is provided for each group type determined as described above, and the reach mode determination random number determination table at the time of jackpot is provided for each hold type. In addition, each reach mode determination random number determination table is also provided for each game state and symbol type. Here, FIG. 12A shows an example of the reach mode determination random number determination table for group x referred to in a predetermined game state and symbol type, and an example of the reach mode determination random number determination table for special 1 jackpot. FIG. 12 (b) shows an example of the special 2 jackpot reach mode determination random number determination table.

When the game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one reach mode determination random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 250. Then, when the result of the above-mentioned major role lottery is "missing", as shown in FIG. 12A, a random number for determining the reach mode at the time of losing corresponding to the group type determined by the above-mentioned group type lottery. The determination table is selected, and the variable mode number is determined based on the selected reach mode determination random number determination table and the reach mode determination random number at the time of loss. If the result of the above-mentioned big win lottery is "big hit", as shown in FIGS. 12 (b) and 12 (c), the big hit reach mode determination random number determination table corresponding to the read hold type is obtained. Is selected, and the variable mode number is determined based on the selected jackpot reach mode determination random number determination table and the reach mode determination random number.

Further, in each reach mode determination random number determination table, the reach mode determination random number is associated with the variation pattern random number determination table described later together with the variation mode number, and at the same time when the variation mode number is determined, the variation pattern The random number judgment table is determined. In FIG. 10, the table x described in the column of the variation pattern random number determination table indicates an arbitrary table number. Therefore, the variation mode number and the table number of the variation pattern random number determination table are determined according to the acquired reach group determination random number and the type of the reach mode determination random number determination table to be referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation mode number and the variation pattern number described later are set in hexadecimal numbers. In the following, "H" is added when indicating a hexadecimal number, but "○○ H" in FIGS. 12 to 14 indicates an arbitrary value indicated by a hexadecimal number. ..

As described above, when the result of the large winning combination lottery is "missing", first, the group type is determined by the reach group determination random number determination table and the reach group determination random number shown in FIG. Then, the variation mode number and the variation pattern random number determination table are determined by the reach mode determination random number determination table and the reach mode determination random number at the time of loss shown in FIG. 12A according to the determined group type and game state.

On the other hand, when the big win lottery result is "big hit", it is shown in FIGS. 12 (b) and 12 (c) according to the determined big hit symbol (type of special symbol), the game state at the time of winning the big hit, and the like. The variation mode number and the variation pattern random number determination table are determined by the reach mode determination random number determination table and the reach mode determination random number.

FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern random number determination table. Here, the variation pattern random number determination table x of a predetermined table number x is shown, but in addition to this, a large number of variation pattern random number determination tables are provided for each table number.

When the game ball enters the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122, one variation pattern random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 238. Then, the variation pattern number is determined as shown in the figure based on the variation pattern random number determination table determined at the same time as the variation mode number and the acquired variation pattern random number.

When the big winning combination lottery is performed in this way, the variable mode number and the variable pattern number are determined according to the big winning combination lottery result, the determined symbol type, the game state, the number of holdings, the holding type, and the like. These variation mode numbers and variation pattern numbers specify the variation effect pattern, and the mode and time of the variation effect are associated with each of them. In the following, the fluctuation mode number and the fluctuation pattern number may be collectively referred to as fluctuation information.

FIG. 14 is a diagram illustrating a fluctuation time determination table. As described above, when the variation mode number is determined, the variation time 1 is determined according to the variation time 1 determination table shown in FIG. 14 (a). According to this variation time 1 determination table, the variation time 1 is associated with each variation mode number, and the corresponding variation time 1 is determined according to the determined variation mode number.

Further, when the fluctuation pattern number is determined as described above, the fluctuation time 2 is determined according to the fluctuation time 2 determination table shown in FIG. 14 (b). According to the fluctuation time 2 determination table, the fluctuation time 2 is associated with each fluctuation pattern number, and the corresponding fluctuation time 2 is determined according to the determined fluctuation pattern number. The total time of the fluctuation times 1 and 2 determined in this way is the time of the fluctuation effect for notifying the result of the big winning combination lottery, that is, the fluctuation time.

When the variation mode number is determined as described above, the variation mode command corresponding to the determined variation mode number is transmitted to the sub-control board 330, and when the variation pattern number is determined, the determined variation The variation pattern command corresponding to the pattern number is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. In the sub-control board 330, the first half mode of the variation effect is mainly determined based on the received variation mode command, and the second half aspect of the variation effect is mainly determined based on the received variation pattern command. It becomes. In the following, the variable mode command and the variable pattern command may be collectively referred to as a variable command, and the details thereof will be described later.

FIG. 15 is a diagram illustrating a special electric accessory operating ram set table. This special electric accessory actuated ram set table stores various data for controlling the major role game, and during the major role game, the opening / closing door solenoid is referred to with reference to this special electric accessory actuated ram set table. The 126c1, the first special winning opening solenoid 126c2, and the second special winning opening solenoid 128c are energized and controlled. In reality, a plurality of special electric accessory operating ram set tables are provided for each type of jackpot symbol, and the corresponding table is set at the start of the jackpot game according to the determined type of jackpot symbol. Here, for convenience of explanation, control data of all jackpot symbols is shown in one table.

When the special symbols A to D, which are the jackpot symbols, are determined, as shown in FIG. 15, the jackpot game is executed with reference to the special electric accessory operating ram set table. The big role game is composed of a plurality of round games in which the first big winning opening and the second big winning opening 128 are opened and closed a predetermined number of times. According to this special electric accessory operating ram set table, the opening time (waiting time until the first round game is started) and the maximum number of special electric accessory operating times (round game executed during one large role game). (Number of times), the number of times the special electric accessory opening / closing is switched (the number of times the first large winning opening 126 and the second large winning opening 128 are opened in one round), the solenoid energizing time (the first large winning opening 126 and the second large winning opening) The energization time of the opening / closing door solenoid 126c1, the first special winning opening solenoid 126c2, and the second special winning opening solenoid 128c for each opening of 128, that is, opening the first special winning opening 126 and the second special winning opening 128 once. Time), specified number (maximum number of winnings to the first big winning opening 126 and the second big winning opening 128 in one round game), effective time to close the big winning opening 126 (first big winning opening 126 between round games) And the closing time of the second prize opening 128, that is, the interval time), the ending time (waiting from the end of the last round game until the normal special game (variation display of the special symbol described later) is resumed. Time) is stored in advance as control data for the big role game for each type of jackpot symbol as shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 12, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the special symbols A and B are determined by the big winning combination lottery, two round games are executed, and when the special symbol C is determined, the special symbol C is determined. Eight round games are executed, and when the special symbol D is determined, ten round games are executed. One round game ends when a specified number (8 in this example) of game balls enters the second large winning opening 128 or when a preset opening time (29 seconds in this example) elapses. To do. Further, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of prize balls are paid out for each game ball that has entered the second large winning opening 128. Therefore, in this example, a total of 80 prize balls (= 10 pieces x the specified number of 8) are paid out in one round game, and in the maximum number of round games (10 times in this example), the maximum number of prize balls is paid out. A total of 800 prize balls (= 80 pieces x 10 rounds) will be paid out. In this way, the player can acquire a prize ball according to the number of rounds to be executed in the big role game based on the jackpot.

FIG. 16 is a diagram illustrating a game state setting table for setting a game state after the end of a major role game. As shown in FIG. 16, when the special symbol A is determined, it is set to the low probability game state after the end of the big role game, and when the special symbols B to D are determined, the high probability is set after the end of the big role game. It is set to the gaming state, and the high-probability gaming state is set to continue until the next big hit is won. In this case, the next time the jackpot is won, the game state will be set again. Therefore, in the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the number of times the high-probability gaming state is continued (hereinafter referred to as "high probability number of times") differs depending on the number of times the large winning combination lottery result is derived until the jackpot is won. The gaming machine 100 may set a predetermined number of times of derivation of a large winning combination lottery result (for example, 100 times) in one high-probability gaming state as a high-probability number. In this case, when the high-probability game state is set after the end of the big role game, if the lottery result of the loss is derived 10,000 times without deriving the lottery result of the big hit in the high-probability game state, the low probability The gaming state will be changed to the gaming state.

In addition, when the special symbols B to D are determined as the jackpot symbols, the gaming state is set to the time-saving gaming state after the end of the major role game, and the time-saving gaming state continues until the next jackpot is won. Is set to be done. In this case, the next time the jackpot is won, the game state will be set again. Therefore, the number of times the time-saving game state is continued (hereinafter referred to as "time-saving number of times") differs depending on the number of times the result of the big winning combination lottery is derived until the jackpot is won. The gaming machine 100 may set a predetermined number of times of derivation of a large winning combination lottery result (for example, 50 times) in one time-saving game state as the time-saving number of times. In this case, the number of time reductions indicates the maximum number of continuations in one time reduction game state, and if a big hit is won before reaching the above number of continuations, the game state is set again. Will be. Further, when the special symbol A is determined as the jackpot symbol, it is set to the non-time saving game state after the end of the big role game. Therefore, when the special symbol A is determined in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the game state becomes the normal game state similar to the initial state of the game machine 100.

As described above, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the game state after the big win game is set according to the type (hit type) of the big hit symbol. Further, the game machine 100 is provided with a plurality of types (4 types in this example) of jackpot symbols (special symbols A to D) in which the number of round games in the major game and the game state set after the major game are different. Has been done. That is, in the big winning combination lottery in the game machine 100, one winning type is determined from a plurality of types of winning types having different game profits (number of prize balls that the player can obtain, occurrence of an advantageous gaming state, etc.). Hereinafter, the jackpot type by the special symbol A will be referred to as "normal jackpot", and the jackpot type by the special symbols B to D will be referred to as "probability variation time reduction jackpot".

In the game machine 100, the game state, the number of high accuracy times, and the number of time reductions may be set according to the type of the jackpot symbol, or depending on both the type of the jackpot symbol and the gaming state at the time of winning the jackpot. The game state after the end of the big role game, the number of high accuracy times, and the number of time reductions may be set.

FIG. 17 is a diagram illustrating a hit determination random number determination table. When a game ball flowing down the game area 116 passes through the gate 124, a determination process of a normal symbol associated with whether or not to control energization of the movable piece 122b of the second starting port 122 (hereinafter referred to as "general drawing lottery"). ) Is performed.

As will be described in detail later, when the game ball passes through the gate 124, one hit determination random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 99, and four of these random numbers are stored in the normal figure reservation storage area of the main RAM 300c. Is stored as the upper limit. That is, the normal figure reservation storage area includes four storage units for saving the winning decision random number. Therefore, when the game ball passes through the gate 124 in a state where the hit decision random number is stored in all four storage units of the normal figure reservation storage area, the hit decision random number is stored based on the passage of the game ball. There is no such thing. In the following, the hit determination random number that the game ball passes through the gate 124 and is stored in the normal figure hold storage area is referred to as a normal figure hold.

When starting the normal drawing lottery in the non-time saving game state, as shown in FIG. 17A, the hit determination random number determination table for the non-time saving game state is referred to. According to this non-time saving game state hit determination random number determination table, when the hit determination random number is 0, the hit symbol is determined as the type of the normal symbol, and when the hit determination random number is 1 to 99, A lost symbol is determined as the type of normal symbol. Therefore, the probability that the winning symbol is determined in the non-time saving game state, that is, the winning probability is 1/100. As will be described in detail later, when the winning symbol is determined in this general drawing lottery, the movable piece 122b of the second starting port 122 is controlled to be in the open state, and when the lost symbol is determined, the second starting port 122 The movable piece 122b of the above is maintained in the closed state.

Further, when starting the normal drawing lottery in the time-saving game state, as shown in FIG. 17B, the hit determination random number determination table for the time-saving game state is referred to. According to the hit determination random number determination table for the time-saving game state, when the hit determination random number is 0 to 98, the hit symbol is determined as the type of the normal symbol, and when the hit determination random number is 99, it is normal. A lost symbol is determined as the type of symbol. Therefore, the probability that the winning symbol is determined in the time-saving game state, that is, the winning probability is 99/100. In this way, during the non-time-saving game state, the winning probability of the normal figure lottery is lower than that during the time-saving game state (normal figure low-probability game state), and during the time-saving game state, the normal figure lottery is won. The probability is higher than that during the non-time saving game state (normal high probability game state).

FIG. 18A is a diagram for explaining a normal symbol fluctuation time data table, and FIG. 18B is a diagram for explaining an open / close control pattern table. As described above, when the general drawing lottery is performed, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined. The normal symbol fluctuation time data table is referred to when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is determined when the winning symbol or the lost symbol is determined by the ordinary symbol lottery. According to this normal symbol variation time data table, the variation time is determined to be 10 seconds when the gaming state is set to the non-time saving gaming state, and varies when the gaming state is set to the time saving gaming state. The time is determined to be 1 second. When the fluctuation time is determined in this way, the normal symbol display 168 is displayed in a variable manner (blinking display) over the determined time. Then, when the winning symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, and when the lost symbol is determined, the normal symbol display 168 is turned off.

Then, when the winning symbol is determined by the ordinary symbol lottery and the normal symbol display 168 is turned on, the movable piece 122b of the second starting port 122 has an open / close control pattern as shown in FIG. 17 (b). Energization is controlled by referring to the table. Actually, the open / close control pattern table is provided for each game state, and the corresponding table is set at the start of energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 122c according to the game state when the normal symbol is determined. However, here, for convenience of explanation, control data corresponding to each gaming state is shown in one table.

When the winning symbol is determined, as shown in FIG. 18B, the opening / closing control of the second starting port 122 is controlled with reference to the opening / closing control pattern table. According to this opening / closing control pattern table, the time before opening the normal electric power (waiting time until the opening of the second starting port 122 is started), the maximum number of times of switching the opening / closing of the normal electric accessory (the number of times of opening the second starting port 122). , The solenoid energizing time (the energizing time of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 122c for each opening number of the second starting port 122, that is, the opening time of the second starting port 122 once), the specified number (the total of the second starting port 122). The maximum number of prizes that can be awarded to the second start port 122 during opening), the normal electric closing effective time (the closing time between each opening of the second starting port 122, that is, the pause time), and the normal electric effective state time (the second start). The second start port is the waiting time from the end of the last opening of the mouth 122) and the waiting time for ending the normal power (waiting time after the lapse of the normal power effective state time until the variable display of the normal symbol described later is resumed). The control data of 122 is stored in advance for each gaming state as shown in the figure.

As described above, the opening / closing control conditions for opening / closing the second start port 122 are associated with the non-time-saving gaming state and the time-saving gaming state as game progress conditions, respectively, and in the time-saving gaming state, the non-time-saving gaming state is associated. It becomes easier for the game ball to enter the second starting port 122 than in the game state. That is, in the time-saving game state, as long as the game ball passes through the gate 124, the drawing lottery is performed one after another, and the second starting port 122 is frequently opened, so that the player consumes the cost of the game ball. It is possible to perform a big role lottery while reducing the number of players.

The opening / closing condition of the second starting port 122 defines three elements: the winning probability of the normal symbol, the time for displaying the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the opening time of the second starting port 122. Then, in the present embodiment, in two of these three elements, the time-saving game state is set more advantageously than the non-time-saving game state, so that the time-saving game state is more advantageous than the non-time-saving game state. , It is set so that the game ball can easily enter the second starting port 122. However, with respect to one or three of the above three elements, the time-saving gaming state may be set more advantageously than the non-time-saving gaming state. In any case, the time-saving game state is more advantageous than the non-time-saving game state for at least one element, so that the time-saving game state is generally more advantageous than the non-time-saving game state. The game ball may easily enter the 122. That is, when the gaming state is set to the non-time saving gaming state, the movable piece 122b is controlled to open and close according to the first condition, and when the gaming state is set to the time saving gaming state, from the first condition. The opening and closing of the movable piece 122b may be controlled according to the second condition in which the movable piece 122b is likely to be opened.

Next, the main processing of the main control board 300 as the game progresses in the game machine 100 will be described with reference to a flowchart.

(CPU initialization process of main control board 300)
19 and 20 are flowcharts for explaining the CPU initialization process (S100) in the main control board 300.

When power is supplied from the power supply board, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 300a, and the main CPU 300a performs the following CPU initialization process (S100).

In the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the state at the time of power-on (hereinafter, referred to as "power-on mode") is divided into four. The setting key switch 180s, the RAM clear detection switch 305s, and the inner frame opening switch are used to determine the four power-on modes.
An example of the determination conditions for the four power-on modes is as follows.

When the power is turned on, the RAM clear detection switch 305s is off (the pressing operation of the RAM clear button 305 is not detected), and the setting key switch 180s is off (not detecting the setting key change operation) or the inner frame is opened. When the switch 145s is in the off state (opening of the inner frame 104 is not detected), it is determined that the normal return mode is set. The normal return mode is a mode indicating that the normal game is started and the power is turned on with the intention of maintaining the information backed up before the power is turned off except for a part of the main RAM 300c.

When the RAM clear detection switch 305s is on (detecting the pressing operation of the RAM clear button 305) and either the setting key switch 180s or the inner frame release switch 145s is off when the power is turned on, the RAM clear recovery mode is set. judge. The RAM clear return mode is a mode indicating that the normal game is started and the power is turned on with the intention of initializing (clearing) the information backed up before the power is turned off in the main RAM 300c.

Further, as described above, when the setting key switch 180s and the inner frame opening switch 145s are on and the RAM clear detection switch 305s is off when the power is turned on, the setting confirmation mode is determined. The setting confirmation mode is a mode indicating that the power is turned on with the intention of confirming the set value on the performance display 300d without starting a normal game.

Further, as described above, when the setting key switch 180s, the inner frame opening switch 145s, and the RAM clear detection switch 305s are all on when the power is turned on, the setting change mode is determined. The setting change mode is a mode indicating that the power is turned on with the intention of changing the set value by pressing the RAM clear button 305 without starting the normal game.

In this way, the four power-on modes can be separated by operating the setting key switch 180s, the RAM clear detection switch 305s, and the inner frame opening switch at the time of power-on.

(Step S100-1)
The main CPU 300a reads the start program from the main ROM 300b as the initial setting process in response to the power-on, performs the setting process necessary for executing various processes, and shifts the process to step S100-3. Further, when the power is turned on, the input signals are read from the inner frame opening switch 145s, the RAM clear detection switch 305s, and the setting key switch 180s. Further, in order to save the number of registers used as internal registers, when the inner frame 104 is in the closed state (the inner frame open switch 145s is in the off state), the setting change key rotation signal (on signal) is input to the main CPU 300a. Also reads the setting key switch 180s to the off state.

(Step S100-3)
The main CPU 300a sets a wait processing time (for example, 3.1 seconds) in the timer counter, and shifts the processing to step S100-5.

(Step S100-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the power supply cutoff warning signal is detected. The main control board 300 is provided with a power supply cutoff detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage becomes equal to or less than a predetermined value, a power supply cutoff warning signal is output from the power supply detection circuit. When the power cutoff warning signal is detected, the process is transferred to step S100-3 and the wait processing time is set again. If the power off warning signal is not detected, the process proceeds to step S100-7.

(Step S100-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the wait time set in step S100-3 has elapsed. As a result, if it is determined that the wait time has elapsed, the process is transferred to step S100-9, and if it is determined that the wait time has not elapsed, the process is transferred to step S100-5.

(Step S100-9)
The main CPU 300a executes a process (for example, a RAM protection release process) necessary for permitting access (read / write) to the main RAM 300c, and shifts the process to step S100-11.

(Step S100-11)
The main CPU 300a confirms the state of the gaming machine before the power is turned off, and shifts the process to step S100-13. There are four types of game machine states (game machine states): a setting change state, a setting confirmation state, a game-enabled state, and an abnormal state.
In the setting change state, the power-on mode is the setting change mode, and the set value can be changed as described above.
In the change confirmation state, the power-on mode is the setting confirmation mode, and the set value can be confirmed as described above.
Further, in the game-enabled state, the power-on mode is the normal return mode or the RAM clear mode, and a normal game such as launching a game ball or a prize ball of a game ball is possible.
An abnormal state occurs in the main RAM 300c, such as a backup error, a read / write error, and a state in which the set value is not included in the predetermined range (1 to 6 in this example) (set value abnormality). Indicates the state of doing. Regardless of the four power-on modes (setting change mode, setting confirmation mode, normal recovery mode, or RAM clear mode), if a problem is detected in the main RAM 300c, the game machine status is abnormal. Is set to.
In addition, a game machine state (setting change state, setting confirmation state, abnormal state) other than the game-enabled state corresponds to a state in which a normal game cannot be executed (game stop state).

In the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the game machine state is held as the value of the game machine state flag. The game machine state flag is stored in the first area (addresses F000H to F1FFH) in which the set value-related information and the game state-related information are stored in the used area (see FIG. 7) of the main RAM 300c. The main CPU 300a loads the game machine state flag from the first area of the used area in the main RAM 300c into a default internal register, and confirms the game machine state before the power is turned off.

(Step S100-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the backup flag is valid and the checksum is normal. Specifically, the main CPU 300a loads the value of the backup flag saved when the power is turned off from the second area in the used area of the main RAM 300c. It also executes the processing required to calculate the checksum. Further, the main CPU 300a determines whether or not the value of the loaded backup flag is a value indicating that the backup is effective (“A5H” in this example), and the calculated checksum is saved when the power is turned off. Determine if it matches the checksum that was made. When the value of the backup flag is "A5H" and the checksums match, the main CPU 300a shifts the process to step S100-15. On the other hand, if the value of the backup flag is not "A5H" or the checksums do not match, the main CPU 300a shifts the process to step S100-29.

(Step S100-15)
The main CPU 300a sets an address in the internal register indicating the area to be cleared in the main RAM 300c when the power is restored (when the data before the power is turned off is maintained without clearing the main RAM 300c). The process is transferred to step S100-17. In this example, addresses corresponding to the second area and the third area shown in FIG. 7 are set in the used area of the main RAM 300c.

(Step S100-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the RAM clear detection switch 305s is in the ON state. When the main CPU 300a determines that the ON signal is input from the RAM clear detection switch 305s and the RAM clear detection switch 305s is in the ON state (the RAM clear button 305 is pressed), the step S100-35 of FIG. 20 is performed. Move the process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the ON signal is input from the RAM clear detection switch 305s and the RAM clear detection switch 305s is not in the ON state (the RAM clear button 305 is not pressed), the process is performed in step S100-19. Transfer.

(Step S100-19)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the game machine state is a game-enabled state, or whether an on signal is input from the setting key switch 180s and the inner frame opening switch 145s. When the main CPU 300a refers to the value of the game machine state flag loaded in step S100-10 and determines that the game is ready for play, the main CPU 300a shifts the process to step S100-21. Further, even if the main CPU 300a determines that the gaming machine state is not the game-enabled state, the main CPU 300a performs the process in step S100-21 in the same manner as determining that the on signal is input from the setting key switch 180s and the inner frame opening switch 145s. Transfer.
On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the game machine state is not in the game-enabled state and the on signal is not input from the setting key switch 180s and the inner frame opening switch 145s, the process shifts to step S100-23. ..

(Step S100-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the game machine state to the setting confirmation state. Specifically, the main CPU 300a sets the value of the game machine status flag loaded in the internal register to a value indicating the setting confirmation status, and shifts the process to step S100-23.

(Step S100-23)
The main CPU 300a performs an initialization process for clearing the data to be cleared when the power is restored, that is, the data in the address area of the main RAM 300c set in step S100-12, and shifts the process to step S100-25.

(Step S100-25)
The main CPU 300a performs a transmission process (stores the command in the transmission buffer) of a subcommand (power restoration designation command) for transmitting to the sub-control board 330 that the power has been restored from the power failure. Here, the power return designation command includes information (game state type) indicating the game machine state at the time of power return. Specifically, the main CPU 300a generates a power return designation command based on the value of the game machine state flag in the internal register. Therefore, when the game machine state is set to the setting confirmation state in step S100-21, the power return designation command generated in this step includes the game machine state type having the content indicating the setting confirmation state.

(Step S100-27)
When the main CPU 300a performs a transmission process (stores the command in the transmission buffer) of a payout command (power return designation command) for transmitting to the payout control board 310 that the power has been restored from the power failure, step S100-53 (FIG. 20). See).

(Step S100-29)
The main CPU 300a stores data indicating that the checksum is in an abnormal state (backup error) in the default internal register (D register), and shifts the process to steps S100-31.

(Step S100-31)
The main CPU 300a executes a read / write check process on the unused area of the main RAM 300c, and confirms the consistency of the write / read results. When the check result is stored in the default internal register, the main RAM 300c shifts the process to steps S100-33.

(Step S100-33)
The main CPU 300a sets the address indicating the area to be cleared in the main RAM 300c to be cleared when the RAM is abnormal in the internal register, and shifts the process to steps S100-35. In this example, addresses corresponding to the used area and the unused area shown in FIG. 7 are set in the memory area of the main RAM 300c. That is, when the backup is abnormal, the data in all the areas of the main RAM 300c will be cleared.

(Step S100-35)
As shown in FIG. 20, the main CPU 300a executes a read / write check process for the used area of the main RAM 300c, stores the check result in a default internal register, and shifts the process to steps S100-37. Further, the main RAM 300c clears the data in the address area of the main RAM 300c set in step S100-15 or step S100-33.

(Step S100-37)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the result of the read / write check process of the used area in steps S100-35 is normal. When the main CPU 300a determines that the result of the read / write check process of the used area is normal, the process shifts to step S100-39. On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the result of the read / write check process of the used area is not normal, the process shifts to step S100-45.

(Step S100-39)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the setting confirmation state is set as the game machine state in the internal register. When the main CPU 300a determines that the value indicating the setting confirmation state is set in the internal register and the game machine state is set to the setting confirmation state in the internal register, the process proceeds to step S100-41. On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines in the internal register that a value indicating a state other than the setting confirmation state is set in the internal register and the game machine state is set in the internal register other than the setting confirmation state, the step S100-43 is performed. Move the process.

(Step S100-41)
The main CPU 300a sets a value indicating a game-enabled state as a value corresponding to the game machine state in the internal register and shifts the process to steps S100-43.

(Step S100-43)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the condition for changing the setting is satisfied. Specifically, when the main CPU 300a determines that an on signal is input from the setting key switch 180s, the inner frame opening switch 145s, and the RAM clear detection switch 305s, it is determined that the condition for changing the setting is satisfied. Then, the process is transferred to steps S100-47. On the other hand, if the main CPU 300a determines that the on signal is not input from at least one of the setting key switch 180s, the inner frame opening switch 145s, and the RAM clear detection switch 305s, the condition for changing the setting is not satisfied. The determination is made and the process is transferred to steps S100-49.

(Step S100-45)
The main CPU 300a sets a value indicating the setting change state as a value indicating the game machine state in the value of the game machine state flag loaded in the internal register, and shifts the process to steps S100-49.
(Step S100-47)
The main CPU 300a sets the value of the game machine state flag loaded in the internal register to a value indicating an abnormal state (RAM abnormal state) in which a RAM abnormality has occurred as a value indicating the game machine state, and in step S100-49. Move the process.

(Step S100-49)
The main CPU 300a saves the value corresponding to the game machine state set in the internal register in the game machine state flag stored in the first area of the used area of the main RAM 300c, and shifts the process to step S100-51. ..

(Step S100-51)
The main CPU 300a executes the initialization process at the time of clearing the RAM. Here, when the RAM is cleared, the power-on mode is the setting change mode or the RAM clear mode (YES in step S100-17), and a backup error occurs (NO in step S100-13 or step S100-). Corresponds to 37 NO). In the initialization process at the time of RAM clear, the main CPU 300a transmits a subcommand (RAM clear designation command) for transmitting to the sub-control board 330 that the main RAM 300c has been cleared (stores the command in the transmission buffer), and A payout command (RAM clear designation command) transmission process (store the command in the transmission buffer) for transmitting the clearing of the main RAM 300c to the payout control board 310 is performed, and the process is transferred to steps S100-53.

Here, the RAM clear designation command includes information (game machine state type) indicating the game machine state at the time of RAM clear. Specifically, the main CPU 300a generates a RAM clear designation command based on the value of the game machine state flag in the internal register. Therefore, for example, when the game machine state is set to the setting change state in steps S100-45, the RAM clear designation command generated in this step includes the game machine state type indicating the setting change state. Further, when the game machine state is set to the abnormal state (RAM abnormal state) in steps S100-47, the RAM clear designation command generated in this step includes the game machine state type indicating the abnormal state.

(Step S100-53)
The main CPU 300a executes a power-on subcommand set process (stores the commands in the transmission buffer) for transmitting various effect commands required for the effect control in the initial state at the time of power-on to the sub-control board 330. In this process, for example, a model designation command, a special phase designation command at power-on, a launch position designation command, a special figure 1 hold designation command indicating the special 1 hold number (X1), and a special figure 2 hold number (X2) are shown. 2 Hold designation command, special figure 1 symbol confirmation designation command, special figure 2 symbol confirmation designation command, etc. are set in the transmission buffer. The main CPU 300a can also set different values for the effect command when the power is restored and when the RAM is cleared.
Further, in the main power-on subcommand set process, the main CPU 300a also stores the set value designation command for transmitting the currently set set value to the sub control board 330 in the transmission buffer.
The main CPU 300a also executes a process of initializing the switch states of various input ports in this process.

For example, when the power is restored, the main CPU 300a sets the value of each effect command and sets it in the transmission buffer based on the backup information held in the first area (see FIG. 7) of the main RAM 300c. By transmitting these effect commands to the sub control board 330, the sub CPU 330a resumes the effect (for example, the jackpot effect associated with the execution of the variable effect or the big role game) that was being executed when the power was cut off last time. Can be made to. When the power is turned off, the sub RAM 330c of the sub control board 330 is cleared. Therefore, in the effect of restarting based on the effect command when the power is restored, the display mode of the effect display unit 200a, the sound output mode of the sound output device 206, the lighting mode of the effect lighting device 204, and the like are the same as when the power is cut off. May be in a different mode. The effect control when the power is restored will be described later.
The main CPU 300a transfers the process to steps S400-55 after executing the subcommand set process at power-on.

(Step S100-55)
The main CPU 300a sets the timer interrupt cycle (4 milliseconds in this example) and shifts the process to step S200.

(Step S200)
The main CPU 300a starts the main loop process. Details of the main loop processing will be described later.

Next, the main loop processing in the main control board 300 will be described. FIG. 21 is a flowchart illustrating the main loop processing. The game machine 100 repeatedly executes the main loop process on the main control board 300 while the power supply is maintained.

(Step S200-1)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for disabling interrupts.

(Step S200-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number. The initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number is for determining the initial value and the ending value of the winning symbol random number. That is, when the hit symbol random number goes around from the initial value update random number for the hit symbol random number to the initial value update random number -1 for the hit symbol random number by the update process of the hit symbol random number described later, the hit symbol random number is obtained at that time. It will be updated to the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number.

(Step S200-5)
The main CPU 300a analyzes the received data (main command) received from the payout control board 310 saved by the serial communication reception interrupt process, and executes various processes according to the received data. The serial communication receive interrupt process is an interrupt process that saves the main command, but detailed description will be omitted.

(Step S200-7)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for transmitting an untransmitted subcommand stored in the transmission buffer to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S200-9)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for permitting an interrupt.

(Step S200-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern random number, and thereafter repeats the processing in the order of steps S200-1 to S200-11. In the following, the reach group determination random number, the reach mode determination random number, and the variation pattern random number for determining the variation effect pattern are collectively referred to as a variation effect random number.

Next, the interrupt processing on the main control board 300 will be described. Here, the save process (XINT interrupt process) and the timer interrupt process when the power is turned off will be described.

(Evacuation processing when the power of the main control board 300 is turned off (XINT interrupt processing))
FIG. 22 is a flowchart illustrating an evacuation process (XINT interrupt process) when the power is turned off in the main control board 300. The main CPU 300a monitors the power supply disconnection detection circuit, and when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value, it interrupts during the interrupt permission period of the main loop processing (between the processing of steps S200-1 and S200-11) to supply power. Executes the save process when the power is cut off.

(Step S300-1)
When the power cutoff warning signal is input, the main CPU 300a saves the register.

(Step S300-3)
The main CPU 300a checks the power off warning signal.

(Step S300-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the power supply cutoff warning signal is detected. As a result, if it is determined that the power off warning signal has been detected, the process is transferred to step S300-11, and if it is determined that the power off warning signal has not been detected, the process is transferred to step S300-7. ..

(Step S300-7)
The main CPU 300a returns the register and returns to the main loop processing.

(Step S300-9)
The main CPU 300a executes an output port clearing process for stopping the output of the output port.

(Step S300-11)
The main CPU 300a executes a backup valid setting process for setting a value (“A5H”) indicating that the backup is valid in the backup valid flag. The backup enable flag is stored in the second area of the used area (see FIG. 7) of the main RAM 300c.

(Step S300-13)
The main CPU 300a executes a checksum setting process for calculating and saving the checksum. In the checksum setting process, the main CPU 300a stores the checksums of all the memory areas (used area and non-used area) allocated to the main RAM 300c in the second area of the used area.

(Step S300-15)
The main CPU 300a executes the RAM protection setting process necessary for prohibiting access to the main RAM 300c.

(Step S300-17)
The main CPU 300a executes a power failure occurrence monitoring time setting process for setting a power failure monitoring timer in order to set the power failure occurrence monitoring time. The game machine 100 according to the present embodiment measures a predetermined power failure occurrence monitoring time (for example, 10 milliseconds) by a power failure monitoring timer.

(Step S300-19)
The main CPU 300a checks the power off warning signal.

(Step S300-21)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the power supply cutoff warning signal is detected. As a result, if it is determined that the power off warning signal has been detected, the process is moved to step S300-17 to newly start the time counting of the power off occurrence monitoring time, and the power off warning signal is not detected. If it is determined, the process is transferred to step S300-23.

(Step S300-23)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the power failure occurrence monitoring time set in step S300-17 has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 300a subtracts 1 from the value of the timer counter of the power-off monitoring timer, and determines the passage of the power-off occurrence monitoring time based on the value indicated by the timer counter after the subtraction. When the main CPU 300a determines that the power failure occurrence monitoring time has elapsed, the main CPU 300a shifts the process to step S300-3. As a result, since the power off warning signal is not detected until the power off occurrence monitoring time elapses (the warning signal is in the off state), the evacuation process when the power is turned off is terminated and the process returns to the main loop process (step S300). Flow from YES of -5 to step S300-7). On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the power failure occurrence monitoring time has not elapsed, the main CPU 300a shifts the process to step S300-19.

When the power is turned off normally, the power cut warning signal is repeatedly checked (by looping the processes of steps S300-17 to S300-21), and the power is turned off due to a voltage drop.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board 300)
FIG. 23 is a flowchart illustrating timer interrupt processing on the main control board 300. The main control board 300 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle (4 milliseconds in the present embodiment, hereinafter referred to as “4 ms”). Then, when a clock pulse is generated by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, the CPU initialization process (step S100) is interrupted and the following timer interrupt process is executed.

(Step S400-1)
The main CPU 300a saves the register.

(Step S400-3)
The main CPU 300a performs a process for permitting an interrupt. The main CPU 300a initializes the interrupt flag when enabling the interrupt. The interrupt flag is a flag that is set (value "1" is set) at a predetermined timer interrupt cycle (4 ms in this example). The period in which the interrupt flag is set is the period in which the occurrence of the timer interrupt is not permitted, and the timer interrupt is permitted by initializing the interrupt flag (setting the value "0").

(Step S400-5)
The main CPU 300a outputs the common data set in the common output buffer to the output port, and outputs the first special symbol display 160, the second special symbol display 162, the first special symbol hold display 164, and the second special symbol display. A dynamic port output process for lighting control of the display 166, the normal symbol display 168, the normal symbol hold display 170, the right-handed notification display 172, and the performance display 300d is executed.

(Step S400-7)
The main CPU 300a reads various input port information and executes a port input process for accurately acquiring the latest switch state. In the port input process, for example, when the main CPU 300a reads various switch signals input to the input port, the main CPU 300a converts the signals into positive logic and stores them in the main RAM 300c. Further, regarding various switch signals, an on detection flag (a flag indicating detection of switching from the off state to the on state) is generated and saved based on the previous input value and the current input value. As a result, it is possible to grasp the accurate switch state based on the change of various switch signals from the previous time.

(Step S400-9)
The main CPU 300a loads the gaming machine status flag and sets the current gaming machine status in the internal register.

(Step S400-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the loaded game machine state is a game-enabled state. When the main CPU 300a determines that the loaded game machine state is a game-enabled state, the main CPU 300a shifts the process to step S400-15. On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the loaded game machine state is not a game-enabled state, the main CPU 300a shifts the process to step S400-13.

(Step S400-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the loaded game machine state is an abnormal state. When the main CPU 300a determines that the loaded game machine state is an abnormal state, the main CPU 300a shifts the process to step S400-29. On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the loaded game machine state is not an abnormal state, the process shifts to step S410.

(Step S410)
The main CPU 300a executes the set value-related process and shifts the process to step S400-29. The set value-related process is a process for confirming or changing the set value, and the game machine state is neither a gameable state nor an abnormal state (NO in step S400-11 and NO in step S400-13). That is, it is executed based on the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. In the present embodiment, the operation related to the change of the set value (for example, pressing the RAM clear button 305) executed from the start to the end of the above-mentioned setting change procedure and the control process on the main control board 300 based on the operation are performed. It may be called "setting change processing". Further, the control process on the main control board 300 executed from the start to the end of the above-mentioned setting confirmation procedure may be referred to as "setting confirmation process". The setting value related processing will be described later.

(Step S400-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a timer update process for updating various timer counters. Here, the various timer counters are subtracted each time the timer interrupt process of the main control board 300 is performed, and the subtraction is stopped when it reaches 0, unless otherwise specified.

(Step S400-17)
Similar to step S200-3, the main CPU 300a executes the update process of the initial value update random number for the winning symbol random number.

(Step S400-19)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of updating the winning symbol random number. Specifically, the random number counter is added and updated by 1, and when the added result exceeds the maximum value of the random number range, the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter makes one round, at that time. Update the initial value for the winning symbol random number Update the random number from the value of the random number.

Although detailed description will be omitted, in the present embodiment, the jackpot determination random number and the hit determination random number use hardware random numbers updated by the hardware random number generator built in the main control board 300. The hardware random number generator updates both the jackpot random number and the hit decision random number according to a certain rule, automatically changes the random number sequence every time the random number sequence goes around, and sets the start value every time the system is reset. I'm changing.

(Step S500)
The main CPU 300a executes a switch management process for determining whether or not a signal has been input from the first start port detection switch 120s, the second start port detection switch 122s, and the gate detection switch 124s. The details of this switch management process will be described later.

(Step S600)
The main CPU 300a executes a special game management process for controlling the progress of the special game. The details of this special game management process will be described later.

(Step S700)
The main CPU 300a executes a normal game management process for controlling the progress of the normal game. The details of this normal game management process will be described later.

(Step S400-21)
The main CPU 300a executes an error management process for determining various errors and making settings according to the error determination results. In the error management process, for example, it monitors magnetism, radio waves, etc., checks the detection status of various sensors, and switches, and detects errors such as abnormalities and malfunctions. Further, in the error management process, the main CPU 300a sets (sets in the transmission buffer) a subcommand when an error occurs (an error occurrence command) and a subcommand when the error is cleared (error clearing command).

(Step S400-23)
The main CPU 300a checks the general winning opening detection switch 118s, the first starting opening detection switch 120s, the second starting opening detection switch 122s, the first major winning opening detection switch 126s, and the second major winning opening detection switch 128s, and each of them is checked. The winning opening switch process for adding the winning ball control counter or the like corresponding to the winning opening detection switch is executed.

(Step S400-25)
The main CPU 300a executes a payout control management process for creating and transmitting a payout command based on the counter value of the prize ball control counter set in step S400-23.

(Step S400-27)
The main CPU 300a executes a launch position designation management process for determining the launch position of the game ball based on the progress status of the game (progress status of the special game or the normal game). In this process, the main CPU 300a of the opening / closing door solenoid 126c1, the first special winning opening solenoid 126c2, the second special winning opening solenoid 128c, and the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 122c based on the special game management phase and the ordinary game management phase described later. The energization status, that is, the open / closed status of the movable piece 122b of the first special winning opening 126, the second special winning opening 128, and the second starting opening 122 is determined, and the firing position (right-handed or left-handed) is determined. Note that this process may be executed in the special game management process.

(Step S400-29)
The main CPU 300a executes an external information management process for setting output data for external information to be output from the game information output terminal plate 312 to the outside (for example, a hall computer installed in a game store). In the external information management process, even during the period when the game machine state is the game stop state (either the setting change state, the setting confirmation state, or the abnormal state), the external information is continuously output and the state of the game machine 100 is externalized. The process for notifying is executed.

(Step S400-31)
The main CPU 300a includes a first special symbol display 160, a second special symbol display 162, a first special symbol hold indicator 164, a second special symbol hold indicator 166, a normal symbol display 168, and a normal symbol hold indicator 170. , The LED display setting process for setting common data for lighting control of various indicators (LEDs) such as the right-handed notification indicator 172 in the common output buffer is executed. Further, for example, in the LED display setting process, the main CPU 300a loads the set value data from the set value buffer of the main RAM 300c, generates display data for displaying the set value on the performance display 300d, and sets it in the common output buffer. To do. As a result, it is possible to switch the display of the set value in the display areas 361 to 364 of the performance display 300d. The lighting control of the ball ejection rate (base) on the performance display 300d is performed by the performance display monitor control process in step S400-41 described later.

(Step S400-33)
The main CPU 300a synthesizes the solenoid output images of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 122c, the opening / closing door solenoid 126c1, the first winning opening solenoid 126c2, and the second winning opening solenoid 128c, and stores the solenoid output image in the output port buffer. Execute the synthesis process.

(Step S400-35)
The main CPU 300a executes a port output process for outputting the value of the common output buffer stored in each output port buffer to the output port.

(Step S400-37)
The main CPU 300a performs a process (set of interrupt flags) for disabling interrupts.

(Step S400-39)
The main CPU 300a executes the test signal output process. In this process, the main CPU 300a generates various test signals representing the current internal state of the game machine 100, and outputs these to the port. With this test signal, for example, at the time of testing the game machine 100, the internal state of the main CPU 300a can be confirmed outside the main control board 300.

(Step S400-41)
The main CPU 300a executes the performance display monitor control process. In this process, the main CPU 300a generates common data for displaying information on the ball output rate (base) on the performance display 300d and sets it in the common output buffer. As a result, it is possible to switch the display of the base value in the display areas 361 to 64 of the performance display 300d. Further, the main CPU 300a may perform arithmetic processing related to the base value displayed on the performance display 300d in the performance display monitor control processing.

(Step S400-43)
The main CPU 300a returns the register and ends the timer interrupt process.

Among the timer interrupt processes described above, the set value-related process in step S410, the switch management process in step S500, the special game management process in step S600, and the normal game management process in step S700 will be described in detail below.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart illustrating the setting value related processing on the main control board 300.

(Step S410-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the game machine state loaded in step S400-9 of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) is the setting change state. When the main CPU 300a determines that the game machine state is the setting change state, the process shifts to step S410-3. On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the game machine state is not the setting change state, that is, the setting confirmation state, the process shifts to step S410-15.

(Step S410-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the set value buffer from the first area (see FIG. 7) of the main RAM 300c, and sets the set value data corresponding to the current set value in the internal register. The set value data is six numerical data of "0" to "5", and corresponds to six levels of set values (settings 1 to 6) in this order. The game machine 100 according to the present embodiment manages the set value by the set value data (numerical values "0" to "5").

(Step S410-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the RAM clear button 305 is pressed. Specifically, in the main CPU 300a, an input signal (on signal) is input from the RAM clear detection switch 305s, and the on detection flag of the RAM clear detection switch 305s is set (value "1" is set), and the input signal is set. When it is determined that the change of the state of is detected, the on detection flag is cleared (value "0" is set), and the process is moved to step S410-7. On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the ON detection flag of the RAM clear detection switch 305s has been cleared and the switching from the OFF state to the ON state has not been detected, the process shifts to step S410-9.

(Step S410-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the set value data set in the internal register to a value obtained by adding 1 to the current set value data. For example, when the set value data loaded in step S410-3 is "3" (data indicating setting 4), the main CPU 300a sets the set value data of the internal register to "4" (indicating setting 5) in this process. Update to data).

(Step S410-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the set value data set in the internal register is less than the set comparison value. Here, the setting comparison value is a numerical value (“6” in this example) that is one larger than the maximum value of the setting value data (setting value data “5” corresponding to the setting value 6). When the main CPU 300a determines that the set value data set in the internal register is less than the set comparison value, the process shifts to step S410-13. On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the set value data set in the internal register is equal to or greater than the set comparison value, the process shifts to step S410-11.

(Step S410-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the numerical value "0" in the internal register as the set value data. As a result, for example, the setting value data "5" corresponding to the maximum setting value 6 can be updated to the setting value data "0" corresponding to the minimum setting value 1. In this way, each time the game machine 100 presses the RAM clear button 305, the set value is sequentially updated to 1 to 6 (set value data "0" to "5"), and the set value 6 is followed by another. The set value can be updated like a loop process that returns to the set value 1. If the set value data updated in the process of step S410-7 is "6" (the same value as the setting comparison value), the set value data may be updated as "0" in the same step. This eliminates the need for the processes of steps S410-9 and S410-11.

(Step S410-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the set value data set in the internal register in the set value buffer of the main RAM 300c. As a result, the set value data is retained as a backup target.

(Step S410-15)
The main CPU 300a confirms an on detection flag (on detection flag of the setting key switch 180s) for determining whether or not the setting key has been rotated or restored at the setting key insertion port 306.

(Step S410-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not it is the timing when the setting key is restored at the setting key insertion port 306 based on the presence / absence of the input signal (on signal) from the setting key switch 180s and the on detection flag. The main CPU 300a does not input an input signal from the setting key switch 180s and has an on detection flag set, and detects that the input signal from the setting key switch 180s is switched from the on state to the off state (no input signal). If it is determined that the signal has been set, the ON detection flag is cleared (the value "0" is set), and the process proceeds to step S410-19. On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the input signal is input from the setting key switch 180s, the on detection flag is cleared, and the on state of the setting key switch 180s is continued, it is determined in steps S410-19 and thereafter. This process is terminated without executing the process of, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23).

(Step S410-19)
The main CPU 300a sets a setting-related end specification command, which is a subcommand indicating that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is terminated. The setting-related end specification command can include, for example, information as to which of the setting change state and the setting confirmation state the setting value is determined based on, and information on the setting value.

(Step S410-21)
The main CPU 300a executes the subcommand group set process. In the subcommand group set processing, when the setting change state and the setting confirmation state are completed and the normal game is started, subcommands other than the above-mentioned setting-related end specification command (for example, various subcommands related to the execution control of the effect) Subcommands (for example, model code specification command, launch position specification command, special figure 1 symbol confirmation specification command, special figure 1 hold specification command, special figure 2 hold specification command, power-on special phase specification command, setting value specification command Etc.)) is set in the send buffer.

(Step S410-23)
The main CPU 300a acquires the address of the ram set table at the end of setting-related from the main RAM 300c and sets it in the internal register.

(Step S410-25)
The main CPU 300a executes a ram set process based on the ram set table at the end of setting.

(Step S410-27)
The main CPU 300a sets a value indicating a game-enabled state in the game machine status flag of the main RAM 300c, ends this process, and returns to the timer interrupt process. As a result, the game machine state is changed from the state at the start of this process (setting change state or setting confirmation state) to a game-enabled state in which normal gaming is possible.

FIG. 25 is a flowchart illustrating a switch management process (step S500) on the main control board 300.

(Step S500-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the gate detection switch is on, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the gate 124 and the detection signal from the gate detection switch 124s is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is detected, the process is transferred to step S510, and if it is determined that the gate detection switch-on is not detected, the process is transferred to step S500-3.

(Step S510)
The main CPU 300a executes the gate passage process based on the passage of the game ball to the gate 124. The details of this gate passing process will be described later.

(Step S500-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the first start port detection switch is on, that is, whether the game ball has entered the first start port 120 and the detection signal has been input from the first start port detection switch 120s. As a result, if it is determined that the first start port detection switch-on is detected, the process is transferred to step S520, and if it is determined that the first start port detection switch-on is not detected, the process is performed in step S500-5. To move.

(Step S520)
The main CPU 300a executes the first starting port passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 120. The details of the process of passing through the first starting port will be described later.

(Step S500-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the second start port detection switch is on, that is, whether the game ball has entered the second start port 122 and the detection signal has been input from the second start port detection switch 122s. As a result, if it is determined that the second start port detection switch-on is detected, the process is transferred to step S530, and if it is determined that the second start port detection switch-on is not detected, the process is performed in step S500-7. To move.

(Step S530)
The main CPU 300a executes the second starting port passing process based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 122. The details of this second starting port passing process will be described later.

(Step S500-7)
The main CPU 300a is at the time of detecting the large winning opening detection switch on, that is, the game ball enters the first large winning opening 126 and the second large winning opening 128, and the first large winning opening detection switch 126s and the second It is determined whether or not the detection signal is input from any one of the large winning opening detection switches 128s. As a result, if it is determined that the large winning opening detection switch is on, the process is moved to step S500-9, and if it is determined that the large winning opening detection switch is not detected, the switch management process is terminated. To do.

(Step S500-9)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the game is currently in a major role game, and determines whether or not the game ball has been properly entered into the first major winning opening 126 and the second major winning opening 128. .. Here, if it is determined that the game is not in the big role game, a predetermined fraud detection process is executed, the game is in the big role game, and the game ball is inserted into the first big winning opening 126 and the second big winning opening 128. When it is determined that the above is properly performed, the large winning opening winning ball number counter and the large winning middle winning ball number counter are added by 1, and the switch management process (step S500) is terminated.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a gate passing process (step S510) in the main control board 300.

(Step S510-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the hit determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S510-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is equal to or greater than the maximum value, that is, whether the counter value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball counter is 4 or more. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball count counter is equal to or higher than the maximum value, the gate passing process is terminated, and when it is determined that the normal symbol reserved ball number counter is not equal to or higher than the maximum value. The process is transferred to step S510-5.

(Step S510-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S510-7)
The main CPU 300a calculates the target storage unit for saving the acquired hit determination random number among the four storage units in the normal figure reservation storage area.

(Step S510-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the winning determination random number acquired in step S510-1 in the target storage unit calculated in step S510-7.

(Step S510-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the normal figure hold designation command indicating the number of normal figure hold stored in the normal figure hold storage area in the transmission buffer, and ends the gate passing process.

FIG. 26 is a flowchart illustrating a first starting port passing process (step S520) in the main control board 300.

(Step S520-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "00H" as a special symbol identification value. The special symbol identification value is for identifying whether the hold type is special 1 hold or special 2 hold, and the special symbol identification value (00H) indicates special 1 hold, and the special symbol identification value ( 01H) indicates special 2 hold.

(Step S520-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes the special symbol random number acquisition process and ends the first start port passing process. The special symbol random number acquisition process is executed by using a module common to the second start port passing process (step S530). Therefore, the details of the special symbol random number acquisition process will be described after the description of the second start port passage process.

FIG. 28 is a flowchart illustrating a second starting port passing process (step S530) in the main control board 300.

(Step S530-1)
The main CPU 300a sets "01H" as a special symbol identification value.

(Step S530-3)
The main CPU 300a sets the address of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol random number acquisition process described later.

(Step S530-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase. As will be described in detail later, the normal game management phase indicates the stage of the normal game execution process, that is, the progress of the normal game, and is updated according to the stage of the normal game execution process.

(Step S530-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the normal game management phase loaded in step S530-5 is "04H". In addition, "04H" of the normal game management phase indicates that the normal electric accessory winning opening opening control process is in progress. In this ordinary electric accessory winning opening opening control process, the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 122c is energized and the movable piece 122b of the second starting port 122 is controlled to be in the open state. Therefore, here, the second starting port 122 is used. Will be determined if is in a state where it can be properly released. As a result, if it is determined that the normal game management phase is not "04H", the second start port passing process is terminated, and if it is determined that the normal game management phase is "04H", step S530-9 Move the process to.

(Step S530-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the normal electric accessory winning ball number counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value, and ends the second starting port passing process.

FIG. 29 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol random number acquisition process (step S535) on the main control board 300. This special symbol random number acquisition process is executed by using a common module in the first start port passage process (step S520) and the second start port passage process (step S530) described above.

(Step S535-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special symbol identification value set in step S520-1 or step S530-1.

(Step S535-3)
The main CPU 300a loads the number of target special symbol reserved balls. Here, if the special symbol identification value loaded in step S535-1 is "00H", the counter value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball count counter, that is, the special 1 reserved number is loaded. If the special symbol identification value loaded in step S535-1 is "01H", the counter value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter, that is, the special 2 reserved number is loaded.

(Step S535-5)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random number updated by the hardware random number generator.

(Step S535-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the number of target special symbol reserved balls loaded in step S535-3 is equal to or greater than the upper limit value. As a result, if it is determined that the value is equal to or higher than the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S535-23, and if it is determined that the value is not equal to or higher than the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S535-9.

(Step S535-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the target special symbol reserved ball count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S535-11)
The main CPU 300a calculates the target storage unit for saving the acquired jackpot determination random number among the storage units in the special figure reservation storage area.

(Step S535-13)
The main CPU 300a has a jackpot determination random number loaded in step S535-5, a hit symbol random number updated in step S400-13, a reach group determination random number updated in step S200-11, a reach mode determination random number, and a variation pattern. A random number is acquired and stored in the target storage unit calculated in step S535-11.

(Step S535-15)
The main CPU 300a performs a special symbol hold ball winning order setting process of updating and storing the winning order of the special 1 hold and the special 2 hold stored in the special symbol hold storage area.

(Step S536)
The main CPU 300a executes the acquisition-time effect determination process based on various random numbers stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13. The details of this acquisition-time effect determination process will be described later.

(Step S535-17)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter.

(Step S535-19)
The main CPU 300a sets the special figure hold designation command in the transmission buffer based on the counter value loaded in step S535-17. Here, the special figure 1 hold designation command is set based on the counter value (special 1 hold number) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter, and based on the counter value (special 2 hold number) of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter. Set the special figure 2 hold specification command. As a result, each time the special 1 hold or the special 2 hold is stored, the special 1 hold number and the special 2 hold number are transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S535-21)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a special symbol winning order command corresponding to the winning order of the special 1 hold and the special 2 hold stored in step S535-15.

(Step S535-23)
The main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase.

(Step S535-25)
The main CPU 300a confirms the normal game management phase loaded in step S535-23, and is less than the normal electric accessory winning opening open control state described later (normal game management phase <
04H) is determined. As a result, if it is determined that the state is less than the normal electric accessory winning opening open control state, the process is moved to step S535-27, and if it is determined that the state is not less than the ordinary electric accessory winning opening open control state, the special case is concerned. The symbol random number acquisition process is terminated.

(Step S535-27)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not there is an abnormal winning at each starting port, and if it determines that there is an abnormal winning, executes a starting opening abnormal winning error process that performs a predetermined process and acquires the special symbol random number. The process (step S535) is terminated.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart illustrating the acquisition-time effect determination process (step S536) on the main control board 300.

(Step S536-1)
The main CPU 300a loads a special symbol probability state flag that identifies whether it is a high-probability gaming state or a low-probability gaming state, and determines whether it is a low-probability gaming state based on the loaded special symbol probability state flag. To do. As a result, if it is determined that the game is in the low-probability gaming state, the process is shifted to step S536-3, and if it is determined that the game is not in the low-probability gaming state, the acquisition-time effect determination process is terminated.

(Step S536-3)
The main CPU 300a selects one of the corresponding jackpot determination random number determination tables (see FIGS. 8A to 8F) based on the set value being set. Then, the main CPU 300a performs a special symbol hit provisional determination process for provisionally determining either a jackpot or a loss based on the selected table and the jackpot determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-5)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol symbol provisional determination process for provisionally determining the special symbol. Here, if the result of the temporary large winning combination lottery in step S536-3 (the result derived by the special symbol hit provisional determination process) is a big hit, the winning symbol stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13. The random number and the hold type are loaded, the corresponding hit symbol random number determination table (see FIG. 7) is selected, the special symbol determination data is extracted, and the extracted special symbol determination data (big hit symbol type) is saved. If the result of the provisional large role lottery in step S536-3 is lost, the special symbol determination data (type of lost symbol) for loss corresponding to the hold type is saved.

(Step S536-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the look-ahead symbol type designation command (look-ahead designation command) corresponding to the special symbol determination data saved in step S536-5 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S536-9)
As will be described in detail later, the main CPU 300a is used for random number identification indicating which of the plurality of random number identification ranges the jackpot determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13 is included in. Determine the range specification command.

(Step S536-11)
The main CPU 300a sets the random number identification range designation command (look-ahead designation command) determined in step S536-9 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S536-13)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result derived by the special symbol hit provisional determination process in step S536-3 is a big hit. As a result, if it is determined that it is a big hit, the process is transferred to step S536-15, and if it is determined that it is not a big hit (it is a loss), the process is transferred to step S536-17.

(Step S536-15)
The main CPU 300a sets a special 1 jackpot reach mode determination random number determination table (see FIG. 12B) or a special 2 jackpot reach mode determination random number determination table (see FIG. 12C) based on the hold type. Then, the process is transferred to step S536-25.

(Step S536-17)
The main CPU 300a loads the reach group determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-19)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-17 has a fixed value (8500 or more). Here, the group type is determined with reference to the reach group determination random number determination table, and this reach group determination random number determination table is selected according to the stored number of reservations. At this time, the reach group determination random number is acquired from the range of 0 to 10066, and if the value of the reach group determination random number is 8500 or more, the same reach group determination random number determination table is selected regardless of the number of reservations, and the reach is reached. If the value of the group determination random number is less than 8500, a different reach group determination random number determination table is selected according to the number of holds. In the following, among the reach group determination random numbers, a value in the range of 0 to 8499 in which a different reach group determination random number determination table is selected according to the number of reservations is set as an indefinite value, and the same reach group determination random number determination is performed regardless of the number of reservations. A value in the range of 8500 to 10006 from which the table is selected is called a fixed value. If it is determined that the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-17 is a fixed value (8500 or more), the process is transferred to step S536-21, and the reach group determination random number loaded in step S536-17 is fixed. If it is determined that the value is not (8500 or more), the process is moved to step S536-33.

(Step S536-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the corresponding reach group determination random number determination table (see FIG. 11) based on the counter value of the probability state identification counter and the hold type. A plurality of types of reach group determination random number determination tables are provided according to the number of holdings, but here, the table used when the number of holdings is 0 is selected. Then, the reach group (group type) is tentatively determined based on the set reach group determination random number determination table and the reach group determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-23)
The main CPU 300a sets a random number determination table for determining the reach mode at the time of loss (see FIG. 12A) corresponding to the group type provisionally determined in step S536-21, and shifts the process to step S536-21.

(Step S536-25)
The main CPU 300a has a variable mode number based on the reach mode determination random number determination table set in step S536-15 or step S536-23 and the reach mode determination random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13. Is tentatively decided. Further, here, the fluctuation pattern random number determination table is tentatively determined together with the fluctuation mode number.

(Step S536-27)
The main CPU 300a sets the look-ahead designation variable mode command (look-ahead designation command) corresponding to the variable mode number tentatively determined in step S536-25 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S536-29)
The main CPU 300a tentatively determines the variation pattern number based on the variation pattern random number determination table tentatively determined in step S536-25 and the variation pattern random number stored in the target storage unit in step S535-13.

(Step S536-31)
The main CPU 300a sets the look-ahead designation variation pattern command (look-ahead designation command) corresponding to the variation pattern number tentatively determined in step S536-29 in the transmission buffer, and ends the acquisition-time effect determination process.

(Step S536-33)
The main CPU 300a is an indefinite value command (look-ahead) indicating that the group type, that is, the variation effect pattern changes according to the number of holds when the hold is read, for the hold newly stored in the target storage unit. The designated variation mode command and the look-ahead specified variation pattern command = 7FH) are set in the transmission buffer, and the effect determination process at the time of acquisition is terminated.

As described above, according to the above-mentioned acquisition-time effect determination process, when the stored hold is a hold that wins a jackpot, and the stored hold is a hold that is lost, and the reach group is determined. When the random number is a fixed value, the look-ahead designation variation mode command and the look-ahead designation variation pattern command are transmitted to the sub-control board 330 as the look-ahead designation command. On the other hand, if the stored hold is a hold that is lost and the reach group determination random number is an indefinite value, an indefinite value command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 as a look-ahead designation command.

FIG. 31 is a diagram illustrating a special game management phase. As described above, in the present embodiment, a special game triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting port 120 or the second starting port 122 and a normal game triggered by the passage of the game ball through the gate 124. And proceed in parallel at the same time. The processing related to the special game is executed stepwise and repeatedly, and the main control board 300 manages each processing related to the special game by the special game management phase.

As shown in FIG. 31, the main ROM 300b stores a plurality of special game control modules for executing and controlling the special game, and each of these special game control modules is associated with a special game management phase. .. Specifically, when the special game management phase is "00H", the module for executing the "special symbol change waiting process" is called, and when the special game management phase is "01H", the module is called. When the module for executing "special symbol change processing" is called and the special game management phase is "02H", the module for executing "special symbol stop symbol display processing" is called and special. When the game management phase is "03H", the module for executing the "pre-processing for opening the large winning opening" is called, and when the special game management phase is "04H", the "opening the large winning opening" is called. When the module for executing "control processing" is called and the special game management phase is "05H", the module for executing "large winning opening closing effective processing" is called and the special game management phase is set. If it is "06H", the module for executing the "large winning opening end wait process" is called.

FIG. 32 is a flowchart illustrating a special game management process (step S600) on the main control board 300.

(Step S600-1)
The main CPU 300a loads the special game management phase.

(Step S600-3)
The main CPU 300a selects the special game control module corresponding to the special game management phase loaded in step S600-1.

(Step S600-5)
The main CPU 300a calls the special game control module selected in step S600-3 to start the process.

(Step S600-7)
The main CPU 300a loads a special game timer that manages the control time of the special game, and ends the special game management process.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol change waiting process on the main control board 300. This special symbol change waiting process is executed when the special game management phase is "00H".

(Step S610-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter, that is, the special 2 hold number (X2) is "1" or more. As a result, when it is determined that the special 2 hold number (X2) is "1" or more, the process is moved to step S610-7, and when it is determined that the special 2 hold number (X2) is not "1" or more. The process is transferred to step S610-3.

(Step S610-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter, that is, the special 1 hold number (X1) is "1" or more. As a result, when it is determined that the special 1 hold number (X1) is "1" or more, the process is transferred to step S610-7, and when it is determined that the special 1 hold number (X1) is not "1" or more. The process is transferred to step S610-5.

(Step S610-5)
The main CPU 300a sets the customer waiting command in the transmission buffer, executes the customer waiting setting process for setting the customer waiting state, and ends the special symbol change waiting process.

(Step S610-7)
The main CPU 300a is stored in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special figure reservation storage area, or in the first storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special figure reservation storage area. The stored special 1 hold is block-transferred to a storage unit having a smaller ordinal number. Specifically, in step S610-1, when it is determined that the number of balls reserved for special symbol 2 is "1" or more, the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the second special symbol reserved storage area are stored. The stored special 2 hold is transferred to the first storage unit to the third storage unit. Further, the main RAM 300c is provided with a 0th storage unit to be processed, and the special 2 hold stored in the 1st storage unit is block-transferred to the 0th storage unit. Further, in step S610-3, when it is determined that the number of balls reserved for special symbol 1 is "1" or more, it is stored in the second storage unit to the fourth storage unit of the first special symbol reserved storage area. The special 1 hold stored in the first storage unit is transferred to the first storage unit to the third storage unit, and the special 1 hold stored in the first storage unit is block-transferred to the 0th storage unit. In this special symbol storage area shift process, the counter value of the target special symbol hold ball count counter corresponding to the hold type transferred to the 0th storage unit is subtracted by "1", and special 1 hold or special 2 hold. Sets the hold decrement command in the send buffer to indicate that "1" has been subtracted.

(Step S610-9)
The main CPU 300a loads the jackpot determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit, the hold type, and the special symbol probability state flag that identifies whether the game is in the high probability gaming state or the low probability gaming state, and the corresponding jackpot determination random number. A judgment table is selected, a large winning combination lottery is performed, and a special symbol hit judgment process for storing the lottery result is executed.

(Step S610-11)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol determination process for determining a special symbol. Here, when the big winning combination lottery result in step S610-9 is a big hit, the winning symbol random number and the hold type transferred to the 0th storage unit are loaded, and the corresponding winning symbol random number determination table is selected. Extract the special symbol judgment data and save the extracted special symbol judgment data (type of jackpot symbol). If the result of the large winning combination lottery in step S610-9 is lost, the special symbol determination data (type of lost symbol) for loss corresponding to the hold type is saved. After saving the special symbol determination data in this way, the symbol type specification command corresponding to the special symbol determination data is set in the transmission buffer.

(Step S610-13)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number corresponding to the special symbol determination data extracted in step S610-11. The first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162 are each composed of 7 segments, and each segment constituting the 7 segments is associated with a number (counter value). The special symbol stop symbol number determined here indicates the number (counter value) of the segment that is finally lit.

(Step S611)
The main CPU 300a executes a special symbol variation number determination process for determining the variation mode number and the variation pattern number. The details of this special symbol variation number determination process will be described later.

(Step S610-15)
The main CPU 300a loads the fluctuation mode number and the fluctuation pattern number determined in step S611, and determines the fluctuation time 1 and the fluctuation time 2 with reference to the fluctuation time determination table. Then, the total time of the determined fluctuation times 1 and 2 is set in the special symbol fluctuation timer.

(Step S610-17)
The main CPU 300a determines whether or not the big win lottery result in step S610-9 is a big hit, and if it is a big hit, loads the special symbol determination data saved in step S610-11 and hits the big hit. Check the type of symbol. Then, the game state set after the end of the big role game is determined with reference to the game state setting table, and the determination result is saved in the special symbol probability state preliminary flag. Further, here, the game state set at the time of winning the jackpot is stored.

(Step S610-19)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of setting a special symbol display symbol counter in the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162 in order to start the variable display of the special symbol. A counter value is associated with each segment of the 7-segments constituting the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162, and the segment corresponding to the counter value set in the special symbol display symbol counter is Lighting is controlled. Here, the counter value corresponding to the segment to be turned on at the start of the variable display of the special symbol is set in the special symbol display symbol counter. The special symbol display symbol counter is provided separately with a special symbol 1 display symbol counter corresponding to the first special symbol display 160 and a special symbol 2 display symbol counter corresponding to the second special symbol display 162. Here, the counter value is set in the counter corresponding to the hold type.

(Step S610-21)
The main CPU 300a loads the counter values of the special symbol 1 hold ball count counter and the special symbol 2 hold ball count counter, and sets the special symbol hold designation command in the transmission buffer. Here, the special figure 1 hold designation command is set based on the counter value (special 1 hold number) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter, and based on the counter value (special 2 hold number) of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter. Set the special figure 2 hold specification command. Further, here, the special symbol winning order command corresponding to the winning order of the special 1 hold and the special 2 hold stored in step S610-7 is set in the transmission buffer. As a result, each time the special 1 hold or the special 2 hold is exhausted, the number of the special 1 hold and the special 2 hold, and the winning order of each of these holds are transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S610-23)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "01H" and ends the special symbol change waiting process.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol variation number determination process on the main control board 300.

(Step S611-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big winning combination lottery in step S610-9 is a big hit. As a result, if it is determined that the hit is a big hit, the process is moved to step S611-3, and if it is determined that the hit is not a big hit (it is a loss), the process is moved to step S611-5.

(Step S611-3)
The main CPU 300a sets a jackpot reach mode determination random number determination table corresponding to the current fluctuation state, jackpot symbol type, and hold type.

(Step S611-5)
The main CPU 300a confirms the counter value of the special symbol 2 hold ball count counter when the hold type of the read hold is the special 2 hold, and when the hold type of the read hold is the special 1 hold, the main CPU 300a confirms the counter value. Special symbol 1 Check the counter value of the reserved ball count counter.

(Step S611-7)
The main CPU 300a sets the corresponding reach group determination random number determination table based on the current fluctuation state, the number of holds confirmed in step S611-5, and the hold type. Then, the reach group (group type) is determined based on the set reach group determination random number determination table and the reach group determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-7.

(Step S611-9)
The main CPU 300a sets a random number determination table for determining the reach mode at the time of loss corresponding to the group type determined in step S611-7.

(Step S611-11)
The main CPU 300a has a variable mode based on the reach mode determination random number determination table set in step S611-3 or step S611-9 and the reach mode determination random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-7. Determine the number. Further, here, the fluctuation pattern random number determination table is determined together with the fluctuation mode number.

(Step S611-13)
The main CPU 300a sets the variable mode command corresponding to the variable mode number determined in step S611-11 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S611-15)
The main CPU 300a determines the variation pattern number based on the variation pattern random number determination table determined in step S611-11 and the variation pattern random number transferred to the 0th storage unit in step S610-7.

(Step S611-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number determined in step S611-15 in the transmission buffer, and ends the special symbol variation number determination process.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart illustrating processing during special symbol change in the main control board 300. This special symbol change processing is executed when the special game management phase is "01H".

(Step S620-1)
The main CPU 300a executes a process of updating the special symbol fluctuation base counter. The counter value of the special symbol fluctuation base counter is set so as to make one round in a predetermined cycle (for example, 100 ms). Specifically, when the counter value of the special symbol fluctuation base counter is "0", a predetermined counter value (for example, 25) is set, and when the counter value is "1" or more, it is set. The counter value is updated to the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the current counter value.

(Step S620-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special symbol variation base counter updated in step S620-1 is "0". As a result, if the counter value is "0", the process is transferred to step S620-5, and if the counter value is not "0", the process is transferred to step S620-9.

(Step S620-5)
The main CPU 300a performs a special symbol variation timer update process of subtracting a predetermined value from the timer value of the special symbol variation timer set in step S610-15.

(Step S620-7)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special symbol variation timer updated in step S620-5 is "0". As a result, if the timer value is "0", the process is transferred to step S620-15, and if the timer value is not "0", the process is transferred to step S620-9.

(Step S620-9)
The main CPU 300a updates the special symbol display timer that measures the lighting time of each segment of the 7-segments constituting the first special symbol display 160 and the second special symbol display 162. Specifically, when the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", a predetermined timer value is set, and when the timer value is "1" or more, the current timer value is used. "1" Updates the timer value to the subtracted value.

(Step S620-11)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is "0", the process is shifted to step S620-13, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special symbol display timer is not "0", the process is concerned. Ends processing during special symbol change.

(Step S620-13)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special symbol display symbol counter to be updated. As a result, each segment constituting the 7-segment is turned on in sequence at predetermined time intervals.

(Step S620-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "02H".

(Step S620-17)
The main CPU 300a saves the special symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in step S610-13 in the target special symbol display symbol counter. As a result, the determined special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162.

(Step S620-19)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a special symbol stop designation command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 160 or the second special symbol display 162.

(Step S620-21)
The main CPU 300a sets the special symbol change stop time, which is the time for stopping and displaying the special symbol, in the special game timer, and ends the processing during the special symbol change.

FIG. 36 is a flowchart illustrating a special symbol stop symbol display process on the main control board 300. This special symbol stop symbol display process is executed when the special game management phase is "02H".

(Step S630-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer set in step S620-21 is "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the special symbol stop symbol display process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the special symbol stop symbol display process is terminated. The process is transferred to step S630-3.

(Step S630-3)
The main CPU 300a confirms the result of the big role lottery.

(Step S630-5)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the result of the big winning combination lottery is a big hit. As a result, if it is determined that it is a big hit, the process is transferred to step S630-17, and if it is determined that it is not a big hit, the process is transferred to step S630-9.

(Step S630-9)
The main CPU 300a executes a variable state update process for updating the variable state.

(Step S630-11)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a command for confirming the game state when the special symbol is confirmed, which indicates the game state when the special symbol is confirmed.

(Step S630-15)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, when the special game management process based on the hold of 1 is completed and the special 1 hold or the special 2 hold is stored, the process for starting the variable display of the special symbol based on the next hold is performed. Will be remembered.

(Step S630-17)
The main CPU 300a sets the data of the special electric accessory operating ram set table according to the type of the determined special symbol.

(Step S630-19)
The main CPU 300a performs a process of setting the maximum number of operations of the special electric accessory. Specifically, referring to the data set in step S630-17, a predetermined number (counter value corresponding to the type of special symbol = number of rounds) is set as a counter value in the special electric accessory maximum operation count counter. .. It should be noted that this special electric accessory maximum operation number counter indicates the number of rounds that can be executed in the large role game to be started from now on. On the other hand, the main RAM 300c is provided with a special electric accessory continuous operation count counter, and by adding the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation counter to "1" at the start of each round game, the current counter value is added. The number of round games is managed. Here, with the start of the big role game, the process of resetting (updating to "0") the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation number counter is also executed.

(Step S630-21)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data set in step S630-17, and saves a predetermined opening time as a timer value in the special game timer.

(Step S630-23)
The main CPU 300a sets an opening designation command for transmitting the start of the major game to the sub-control board 330 in the transmission buffer.

(Step S630-25)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "03H" and ends the special symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the big role game will be started.

FIG. 37 is a flowchart illustrating the pre-opening process of the large winning opening on the main control board 300. This large winning opening pre-opening process is executed when the special game management phase is "03H".

(Step S640-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer set in step S630-21 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening is terminated, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", The process is transferred to step S640-3.

(Step S640-3)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value.

(Step S640-5)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a command for specifying the opening of the first special winning opening 126 and the opening of the second special winning opening 128 (start of the round game) to be transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

(Step S641)
The main CPU 300a executes a large winning opening opening / closing switching process. This large winning opening opening / closing switching process will be described later.

(Step S640-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "04H" and ends the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening.

FIG. 38 is a flowchart illustrating a large winning opening opening / closing switching process on the main control board 300.

(Step S641-1)
In the main CPU 300a, the counter value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter is the number of times the special electric accessory opening / closing switching is performed (the number of times the first special winning opening 126 and the second major winning opening 128 are opened / closed during one round game). Determine if it is the upper limit. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the large winning opening opening / closing switching process is terminated, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process is moved to step S641-3.

(Step S641-3)
The main CPU 300a refers to the data of the special electric accessory operating ram set table, and based on the counter value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter, the opening / closing door solenoid 126c1, the first large winning opening solenoid 126c2, and the second large winning prize. The solenoid control data for controlling the energization of the mouth solenoid 128c and the timer data which is the energization time or the energization stop time of the opening / closing door solenoid 126c1 and the first special winning opening solenoid 126c2 and the second special winning opening solenoid 128c are extracted.

(Step S641-5)
Based on the solenoid control data extracted in step S641-3, the main CPU 300a starts energizing the opening / closing door solenoid 126c1, the first winning opening solenoid 126c2, and the second winning opening solenoid 128c, or the opening / closing door. The special winning opening solenoid energization control process for stopping the energization of the solenoid 126c1 and the first special winning opening solenoid 126c2 and the second special winning opening solenoid 128c is executed. By executing this large winning opening solenoid energization control process, in steps S400-25 and S400-27, energization start or energization of the opening / closing door solenoid 126c1, the first special winning opening solenoid 126c2, and the second special winning opening solenoid 128c is started or stopped. Will be controlled.

(Step S641-7)
The main CPU 300a saves the timer value based on the timer data extracted in step S641-3 in the special game timer. The timer value saved in the special game timer here is the maximum opening time of one of the first special winning opening 126 and the second special winning opening 128.

(Step S641-9)
The main CPU 300a is in the energization start state of the opening / closing door solenoid 126c1, the first winning opening solenoid 126c2, and the second winning opening solenoid 128c, that is, in step S641-5, the opening / closing door solenoid 126c1 and the first winning opening solenoid It is determined whether the control process for starting the energization of the 126c2 and the second special winning opening solenoid 128c has been performed. As a result, if it is determined that the energization start state is established, the process is shifted to step S641-11, and if it is determined that the energization start state is not present, the large winning opening opening / closing switching process is terminated.

(Step S641-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the counter value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter to a value obtained by adding "1" to the current counter value, and ends the special winning opening opening / closing switching process.

FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating a large winning opening opening control process on the main control board 300. This large winning opening opening control process is executed when the special game management phase is "04H".

(Step S650-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S641-7 is "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the process is transferred to step S650-5, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", step S650 is performed. Move the process to -3.

(Step S650-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching number counter is the upper limit value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching number. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value is the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S650-7, and when it is determined that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the process is transferred to step S641.

(Step S641)
If it is determined in step S650-3 that the counter value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter is not the upper limit value of the special electric accessory opening / closing switching count, the main CPU 300a executes the process of step S641. To do.

(Step S650-5)
In the main CPU 300a, the counter value of the large winning opening winning ball number counter updated in step S500-9 has not reached the specified number, that is, the first large winning opening 126 or the second large winning opening 128 is set. It is determined whether or not the same number of game balls as the maximum number of winning balls in one round have been entered. As a result, if it is determined that the specified number has not been reached, the large winning opening opening control process is terminated, and if it is determined that the specified number has been reached, the large winning opening winning ball counter is returned to 0. (Initialize) Move the process to step S650-7.

(Step S650-7)
The main CPU 300a is required to stop the energization of the opening / closing door solenoid 126c1, the first special winning opening solenoid 126c2, and the second special winning opening solenoid 128c to close the first special winning opening 126 and the second special winning opening 128. Execute the large winning opening closing process. As a result, the first prize opening 126 and the second prize opening 128 are closed.

(Step S650-9)
The main CPU 300a saves the winning opening closing effective time (interval time) in the special game timer.

(Step S650-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "05H".

(Step S650-13)
The main CPU 300a sets a command for designating the closing of the first special winning opening 126 and the second special winning opening 128 in the transmission buffer, and ends the special winning opening opening control process.

FIG. 40 is a flowchart illustrating a large winning opening closing effective process in the main control board 300. This special game management phase is executed when the special game management phase is "05H".

(Step S660-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S650-9 is not "0". As a result, if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the special game timer closing valid processing is terminated, and if it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the step The process is transferred to S660-3.

(Step S660-3)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation count counter matches the counter value of the special electric accessory maximum operation count counter, that is, whether the round game of a preset number of times is completed. .. As a result, when it is determined that the counter value of the special electric accessory continuous operation count counter matches the counter value of the special electric accessory maximum operation count counter, the process is transferred to step S660-9, and when it is determined that they do not match. The process is transferred to step S660-5.

(Step S660-5)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "03H".

(Step S660-7)
The main CPU 300a saves a predetermined large winning opening closing time in the special game timer, and ends the large winning opening closing valid process. As a result, the next round game will be started.

(Step S660-9)
The main CPU 300a executes an ending time setting process for saving the ending time in the special game timer.

(Step S660-11)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "06H".

(Step S660-13)
The main CPU 300a sets an ending designation command indicating the start of the ending in the transmission buffer, and ends the large winning opening closing valid processing.

FIG. 41 is a flowchart illustrating a large winning opening end wait process on the main control board 300. This large winning opening end wait process is executed when the special game management phase is "06H".

(Step S670-1)
The main CPU 300a determines whether the timer value of the special game timer saved in step S660-9 is not "0". As a result, when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is not "0", the special game timer end wait process is terminated, and when it is determined that the timer value of the special game timer is "0", the special game timer is determined to be "0". The process is transferred to step S670-3.

(Step S670-3)
The main CPU 300a executes a state setting process for setting a game state after the end of the major game. Here, the game state after the end of the big role game is set based on the big hit symbol that triggered the execution of the big role game. Specifically, the main CPU 300a is set to the high-probability game state and the time-saving game state (special symbol probability state flag and normal symbol) when the jackpot symbols that triggered the execution of the big role game are the special symbols B to D. Set the time saving status flag to "1"). The special symbol probability state flag identifies whether the gaming state is a low probability gaming state (“0”) or a high probability gaming state (“1”) depending on the set value (“0” or “1”). It is a flag to do. In addition, the normal symbol time saving state flag determines whether the gaming state is the non-time saving gaming state ("0") or the time saving gaming state ("1") depending on the set value ("0" or "1"). It is a flag for identification. The special symbol probability state flag and the normal symbol time saving state flag are stored in a predetermined storage area of, for example, the main RAM 300c. If the jackpot symbol that triggered the execution of the big role game is the special symbol A, it is set to the low probability game state and the non-time saving game state (the special symbol probability state flag is set to "0" and the normal symbol time saving state flag). Is set to "0").

(Step S670-5)
The main CPU 300a sets in the transmission buffer a post-major game state change designation command for transmitting a game state set after the end of the major game.

(Step S670-7)
The main CPU 300a updates the special game management phase to "00H" and ends the large winning opening end wait process. As a result, when the special 1 hold or the special 2 hold is stored, the variable display of the special symbol is restarted.

(Normal game)
As described above, in the present embodiment, the processing related to the normal game triggered by the passage of the game ball to the gate 124 is executed stepwise and repeatedly, but in the main control board 300, such a normal game is executed. Each process related to is managed by the normal game management phase.

A plurality of normal game control modules for executing and controlling normal games are stored in the main ROM 300b, and a normal game management phase is associated with each of these normal game control modules. Specifically, when the normal game management phase is "00H", the module for executing the "normal symbol change waiting process" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "01H", the module is called. When the module for executing "normal symbol change processing" is called and the normal game management phase is "02H", the module for executing "normal symbol stop symbol display processing" is called and normal. When the game management phase is "03H", the module for executing "pre-processing for opening the winning opening of the normal electric accessory" is called, and when the normal game management phase is "04H", "normal". When the module for executing the "electric accessory winning opening opening control process" is called and the normal game management phase is "05H", the module for executing the "normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective processing" Is called, and when the normal game management phase is "06H", the module for executing the "normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process" is called.

Here, each process of the normal game control module will be described. In the present embodiment, in the normal game management process on the main control board 300, the main CPU 300a loads the normal game management phase and selects the normal game control module corresponding to the loaded normal game management phase.

In the normal game management process on the main control board 300, the main CPU 300a loads "00H" as the normal game management phase, selects the normal symbol change waiting process as the normal game control module, and the normal symbol hold is "0". Is determined. When the main CPU 300a determines that the normal symbol hold is "0", the main CPU 300a ends the normal symbol change waiting process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the normal figure hold is not "0", the main CPU 300a performs a normal figure lottery for the normal figure hold (hit determination random number) stored in the first storage unit of the normal figure hold storage area. Hit judgment processing, normal symbol stop symbol number setting process that indicates whether or not to finally turn on the normal symbol display 168 in response to the result of the normal symbol lottery, determination of the normal symbol fluctuation time that determines the normal symbol fluctuation time Processing, setting processing of the normal symbol display symbol counter to start the variable display of the normal symbol, and the transmission buffer of the normal symbol specification command based on the symbol type (hit symbol or lost symbol) determined by the normal symbol hit determination process. Execute setting processing and so on. Further, the main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "01H" and ends the normal symbol change waiting process.

In the normal game management process on the main control board 300, the main CPU 300a loads "01H" as the normal game management phase, selects the normal symbol changing process as the normal game control module, and sets the timer value of the normal game timer to ". It is determined whether it is "0". When the main CPU 300a determines that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the normal symbol display 168 is repeatedly turned on and off, so that the counter value of the normal symbol display symbol counter (the normal symbol display 168 is turned off). Alternatively, the update setting process (counter value indicating lighting) is executed, and the normal symbol change waiting process is terminated. By alternately updating and setting the counter value indicating that the normal symbol display symbol counter is off and the counter value indicating lighting, the normal symbol display 168 repeats turning on and off at predetermined time intervals over the normal symbol fluctuation time. It will (blink).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the normal symbol display symbol counter is charged with the normal symbol stop symbol number (counter value) determined in the normal symbol display waiting process. Save. As a result, the result of the general drawing lottery will be notified. In addition, the main CPU 300a performs setting processing of the normal symbol fluctuation stop time, which is the time for stopping and displaying the normal symbol, and setting processing of the normal symbol stop designation command indicating that the stop display of the normal symbol has started in the transmission buffer. It is executed, and further, the normal game management phase is updated to "02H", and the processing during the change of the normal symbol is terminated.

In the normal game management process on the main control board 300, the main CPU 300a loads "02H" as the normal game management phase, selects the normal symbol stop symbol display process as the normal game control module, and sets the timer value of the normal game timer. Determine if it is not "0". When the main CPU 300a determines that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the main CPU 300a ends the normal symbol stop symbol display process.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0" and determines that the result of the normal game lottery is not a hit (missing), the normal game management phase is set to "00H". Update and stop the normal symbol. End the symbol display process. Further, when the main CPU 300a determines that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0" and determines that the result of the normal game lottery is a hit, the main CPU 300a saves the time before the opening of the normal game as the timer value of the normal game timer. At the same time, the normal game management phase is updated to "03H" to end the normal symbol stop symbol display process. As a result, the opening / closing control of the second starting port 122 is started.

In the normal game management process on the main control board 300, the main CPU 300a loads "03H" as the normal game management phase, selects the normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening process as the normal game control module, and selects the normal game timer. It is determined whether the timer value is "0". When the main CPU 300a determines that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the main CPU 300a ends the pre-opening process of the normal electric accessory winning opening.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the main CPU 300a executes the normal electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process. In the normal electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process, the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter is the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count (movability of the second starting port 122 during one opening / closing control). When it is determined that the upper limit value of the opening / closing number of the piece 122a) is determined, the normal electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process is terminated. On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter is not the upper limit of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count, the normal electric accessory solenoid 122c is normally energized to start or stop. The electric accessory solenoid energization control process is executed. By executing this normal electric accessory solenoid energization control process, the energization start or energization stop of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 122c is controlled.

The main CPU 300a saves a timer value, which is the maximum opening time of the second start port 122 once, in the normal game timer based on the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter. When the main CPU 300a determines that the energization start control process of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 122c is executed in the above-mentioned ordinary electric accessory solenoid energization control process, the counter value of the ordinary electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter is set to the current counter value. The value is updated to the value obtained by adding "1" to the normal electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the energization start control process of the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 122c is not executed, the ordinary electric accessory winning opening is opened / closed without updating the counter value of the ordinary electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter. The switching process ends.

The main CPU 300a ends the normal electric accessory winning opening opening / closing switching process, updates the normal game management phase to "04H", and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening pre-opening process.

In the normal game management process on the main control board 300, the main CPU 300a loads "04H" as the normal game management phase, selects the normal electric accessory winning opening opening control process as the normal game control module, and selects the normal electric accessory winning opening control process. It is determined whether or not the timer value of the normal game timer saved in the winning open / close switching process is "0". When the main CPU 300a determines that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the main CPU 300a determines whether the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching number counter is the upper limit value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching number. When the main CPU 300a determines that the counter value of the normal electric accessory opening / closing switching count counter is the upper limit value, the main CPU 300a executes the ordinary electric accessory closing process described later. Further, when the main CPU 300a determines that the counter value is not the upper limit value, the main CPU 300a executes the above-mentioned normal electric accessory winning open / close switching process.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the timer value of the normal game timer saved in the normal electric accessory winning open / close switching process is not "0", the normal electric accessory winning is updated in the above-mentioned second start port passing process. It is determined whether the counter value of the ball number counter reaches the specified number and the same number of game balls as the maximum number of winning games that can be won during one opening / closing control have entered the second starting port 122. When it is determined that the number of balls entered has not reached the specified number, the main CPU 300a ends the normal electric accessory winning opening opening control process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the number of balls entered has reached the specified number, the main CPU 300a stops the energization of the normal electric accessory solenoid 122c in order to close the second starting port 122, and performs the ordinary electric function. The object closing process is executed, the solenoid effective state time is saved in the normal game timer, and the normal game management phase is updated to "05H" to end the normal electric accessory winning opening opening control process.

In the normal game management process on the main control board 300, the main CPU 300a loads "05H" as the normal game management phase, selects the normal electric accessory winning opening closing effective process as the normal game control module, and performs the above-mentioned normal electric. It is determined whether or not the timer value of the normal game timer saved by the bonus opening opening control process is "0". When the main CPU 300a determines that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the main CPU 300a ends the normal electric accessory winning opening closing valid processing.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the main CPU 300a saves the normal game end wait time in the normal game timer, updates the normal game management phase to "06H", and is normally electric. The closing of the winning opening for the character is completed.

In the normal game management process on the main control board 300, the main CPU 300a loads "06H" as the normal game management phase, selects the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process as the normal game control module, and performs the above-mentioned normal electric. It is determined whether the timer value of the normal game timer saved by the bonus opening closing valid processing is not "0". When the main CPU 300a determines that the timer value of the normal game timer is not "0", the main CPU 300a ends the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 300a determines that the timer value of the normal game timer is "0", the main CPU 300a updates the normal game management phase to "00H" and ends the normal electric accessory winning opening end wait process. As a result, when the normal symbol hold is stored, the variable display of the normal symbol is restarted.

As described above, the special game and the normal game proceed by executing various processes on the main control board 300, and during the progress of such a game, a command transmitted from the main control board 300 Based on the above, the sub-control board 330 is controlled to execute various effects.

(Example of production decision table)
Next, a method of determining the mode of the variable effect executed by the effect display unit 200a will be described. FIG. 42 (a) is a diagram for explaining the first half variation effect determination table, and FIG. 42 (b) is a diagram for explaining the second half variation effect determination table. In the present embodiment, the mode of the first half variation effect (hereinafter referred to as “first half variation effect”) is determined based on the variation mode number (variation mode command), and the second half variation is determined based on the variation pattern number (variation pattern command). The mode of the effect (hereinafter referred to as "second half variable effect") is determined. Specifically, in the variation effect of the reach variation pattern, the mode of the variation effect (the image pattern displayed on the effect display unit 200a) until the predetermined moving image (reach development effect) is reproduced and displayed is the variation mode number. It is determined based on (variation mode command), and the image pattern of the moving image (reach development effect) is determined based on the variation pattern number (variation pattern command). Therefore, for example, in the variation effect of the reach variation pattern described later, the mode (for example, an image pattern) of the variation effect from the start of the variation display of the effect symbol to the reach effect is determined based on the variation mode number (variation mode command). The mode (for example, moving image) of the variation effect of the reach development effect is determined based on the variation pattern number (variation pattern command).

The variation effect of the non-reach pattern is executed when the variation mode number (variation mode command) indicating that the first half variation effect is not executed and the predetermined variation pattern number (variation pattern command) are determined. For example, upon receiving the variation mode command corresponding to the variation mode number of "00H" indicating that the first half variation effect is not executed, the sub-control board 330 always determines "none" as the mode of the first half variation effect. Further, based on the variation pattern command received at the same time, the mode of the variation effect from the start to the end is determined. Therefore, the mode (image pattern) of the variation effect of the non-reach pattern is determined based on the variation pattern number (variation pattern command).

As shown in FIG. 42 (a), the sub ROM 330b of the sub control board 330 has a first half variation effect determination table in which the mode of the first half variation effect is associated with each of the receiveable variation mode commands (variation mode number). Is remembered. This first half variation effect determination table is provided for each effect mode, and when the sub-control board 330 receives the variation mode command, it acquires an effect random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249 and is currently set. Set the first half variable production decision table corresponding to the production mode. Then, the mode of the first half variation effect is determined based on the acquired effect random number and the variation mode command (variation mode number).

In addition, in FIG. 42A, the number written in each selection area in which the variation mode number and the mode of the first half variation effect are associated is the range of random numbers allocated to the selection area, that is, the selection area. The selection ratio of is shown. For example, when the variable mode command corresponding to the variable mode number = 00H is received, "none" is always determined as the mode of the first half variable effect, and the variable mode command corresponding to the variable mode number = 01H is received. In this case, as the mode of the first half variation effect, the variation effect of "reach A" is always determined, and when the variation mode command corresponding to the variation mode number = 02H is received, the mode of the first half variation effect is always determined. , The variation effect of "reach B" is determined, and when the variation mode command corresponding to the variation mode number = 03H is received, the variation effect of "reach C" is always determined as the mode of the first half variation effect. It will be. Further, when the variation mode command corresponding to the variation mode number = 04H is received, either "reach C" or "reach D" variation effect is determined with a probability of 50% as the mode of the first half variation effect. Will be done.

Here, "none" in the mode of the first half variation effect indicates that the first half variation effect is not executed, and when this "none" is determined, it is determined based on the variation pattern command described later. Only the latter half variation effect will be executed. Further, in FIG. 42 (a), "reach A", "reach B", "reach C", and "reach D" in the mode of the first half variation effect are the effect symbols 210a among the variation effects of the reach variation pattern, respectively. , 210b, 210c show the image pattern displayed on the effect display unit 200a until the reach mode is reached. These image patterns are pre-designed to coincide with the variation display time of the special symbol associated with the variation mode number.

Therefore, when the effect display unit 200a executes the variation effect of the non-reach pattern, it means that the variation mode command corresponding to the variation mode number = 00H is always received. In other words, upon receiving the variation mode command corresponding to the variation mode number = 00H, the effect display unit 200a always executes the variation effect of the non-reach pattern. On the other hand, when the effect display unit 200a executes the variation effect of the reach variation pattern, it means that the variation mode command corresponding to the variation mode number other than the variation mode number = 00H is always received. Become. In other words, when a variation mode command other than the variation mode command corresponding to the variation mode number = 00H is received, the effect display unit 200a always executes the variation effect of the reach variation pattern.

Further, as shown in FIG. 42B, the sub ROM 330b of the sub control board 330 is associated with the latter half variation effect in which the mode of the second half variation effect is associated with each of the fluctuating pattern commands (variation pattern numbers) that can be received. The decision table is stored. This latter half variation effect determination table is provided for each effect mode, and when the sub-control board 330 receives the variation pattern command, it acquires an effect random number of 1 from the range of 0 to 249 and is currently set. Set the latter half variable production decision table corresponding to the production mode. Then, the mode of the latter half variation effect is determined based on the acquired effect random number and the variation pattern command (variation pattern number).

In addition, in FIG. 42 (b), the number written in each selection area in which the variation pattern number and the mode of the latter half variation effect are associated with each other is assigned to the selection area as in FIG. The range of random numbers, that is, the selection ratio of the selected area is shown. For example, when a variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number = 00H is received, the variation effect of "loss 4 seconds" is always executed as the mode of the latter half variation effect, and the variation corresponding to the variation pattern number = 01H is executed. When a pattern command is received, as a mode of the latter half variation effect, the variation effect of "loss 8 seconds" is always executed, and when the variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number = 02H is received, the latter half variation is performed. As an aspect of the effect, a variable effect of "loss 12 seconds" is always executed.

It should be noted that the mode of the variable effect of "loss 4 seconds", "loss 8 seconds", and "loss 12 seconds" does not become the reach mode after the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c start the variable display. The stop display is performed in a mode of notifying the loss at 4 seconds, 8 seconds, and 12 seconds, respectively. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern numbers of "00H", "01H", and "02H" are determined in the main control board 300, "None" is always determined as the mode of the first half variation effect. It is designed so that the variable mode number (variable mode command) of "00H" is determined.

Further, in the main control board 300, for example, when the variation pattern number = 03H is determined, "pattern 1" is determined as the mode of the latter half variation effect. For example, when the variation pattern number = 04H is determined, either "Pattern 1" or "Pattern 2" is determined as the mode of the latter half variation effect. "Pattern 1" and "Pattern 2" indicate, for example, the type of moving image in the reach development effect, and although the images displayed on the effect display unit 200a are different, the configuration time corresponds to the variation pattern number = 04H. It matches the time of the attached variable display.

As described above, in the sub-control board 330, the first half variation effect determination table and the second half variation effect determination table are selected according to the set effect mode, and the effect display unit 200a is displayed based on the selected tables. The mode of the variable effect to be displayed is determined.

The processing on the sub-control board 330 for executing the above effect will be described below.

(Sub CPU initialization process of sub control board 330)
FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating the sub CPU initialization process (S1000) of the sub control board 330.

(Step S1000-1)
The sub CPU 330a performs initialization processing according to power-on or RAM clear of the main control board 300. Specifically, when the sub CPU 330a receives the power recovery designation command or the RAM clear designation command indicating that the power has been restored from the main control board 300, the sub CPU 330a reads the CPU initialization processing program from the sub ROM 330b and enters the sub RAM 330c. Initialization and setting processing of the stored flags and the like are performed, and the processing is transferred to step S100-3. As a result, when the power is turned on to the game machine 100 after the power is turned off due to, for example, a power failure, information such as various effects executed when the power is turned off is cleared.

(Step S1000-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the game machine state at the time of the initialization process is the setting change state. Specifically, when it is determined that the sub PCU330a has received the RAM clear designation command and the RAM clear command includes the game machine state type indicating the setting change state, the process proceeds to step S100-5. On the other hand, when the sub PCU330a determines that the RAM clear designation command has not been received or the game machine state type included in the RAM clear designation command does not indicate the setting change state, the process proceeds to step S1000-7.

(Step S1000-5)
The sub CPU 330a sets the setting change state flag indicating whether or not the game machine state is the setting change state to the on state, and shifts the process to step S1000-11. The setting change status flag is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 330c. When it is in the on state, it indicates that the game machine state is in the setting change state, and when it is in the off state, it indicates that it is not in the setting change state. Shown.

(Step S1000-7)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the game machine state at the time of the initialization process is the setting confirmation state. Specifically, when it is determined that the sub PCU330a has received the power recovery designation command and the power recovery designation command includes the game machine state type indicating the setting confirmation status, the process is transferred to step S100-9. .. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the power recovery designation command has not been received or the game machine state type included in the power recovery designation command does not indicate the setting change confirmation state, the process proceeds to step S1000-11.

(Step S1000-9)
The sub CPU 330a sets the setting confirmation state flag indicating whether or not the game machine state is the setting confirmation state to the on state, and shifts the process to step S1000-11. The setting confirmation status flag is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 330c. When it is in the on state, it indicates that the game machine state is in the setting confirmation state, and when it is in the off state, it indicates that it is not in the setting confirmation state. Shown.

(Step S1000-11)
The sub CPU 330a creates a setting-related notification start command for starting the setting-related notification effect in each effect device, and sets it in the transmission buffer. The setting-related notification effect is an effect of notifying that the game machine state is either a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. In addition, the setting-related notification start command includes information (setting type information) indicating whether the game machine state is the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. The setting-related notification start command is transmitted to the image control unit 340, the voice control unit 350, and the lighting control unit 360 with the start of the interrupt processing (subtimer interrupt processing described later). As a result, the setting-related notification effect is executed using the effect display unit 200a, the sound output device 206, and the effect lighting device 204, and it is notified that the game machine state is either a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. Will be done. The details of the setting-related notification effect will be described later.

(Step S1000-13)
The sub CPU 330a executes the initialization process of the effect device, and shifts the process to step S1000-15. The initialization process of the effect device is a process for initializing the effect device when the power of the game machine 100 is turned on or when the RAM is cleared. The initialization process includes, for example, an initial operation control process for causing the effect accessory device 202 to perform an initial operation (for example, an operation of moving from an initial position to a predetermined position and returning to the initial position). The sub CPU 330a creates a command (initial operation command) including the initial operation control data and sets it in the transmission buffer. The initial operation command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to the movable body control unit 370 with the start of the subtimer interrupt processing. When the movable body control unit 370 receives the command, the movable body control unit 370 refers to data such as the number of steps, acceleration, drive speed, and rotation direction of the motor (not shown) for the effect accessory device 202 included in the initial operation control data. Directing accessory device 202 The initial operation is executed.

The initialization process of the effect device includes a process of setting the brightness of the effect display unit 200a and the amount of light of the effect lighting device 204 to default values, a process of setting the volume of the audio output device 206 to default values, and the like. You may.

(Step S1000-15)
Next, the sub CPU 330a performs a process of updating each effect random number, and thereafter repeats the process of step S1000-3 until the interrupt process is performed. It should be noted that a plurality of types of effect random numbers are provided, and here, each effect random number is updated asynchronously.

(Subtimer interrupt processing of subcontrol board 330)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart illustrating subtimer interrupt processing (S1100) of the subcontrol board 330. The sub-control board 330 is provided with a reset clock pulse generation circuit (not shown) that generates a clock pulse at a predetermined cycle. Then, due to the generation of the clock pulse by the reset clock pulse generation circuit, the sub CPU 330a reads the timer interrupt processing program and starts the sub timer interrupt processing.

(Step S1100-1)
The sub CPU 330a saves the register.

(Step S1100-3)
The sub CPU 330a performs a process for permitting an interrupt.

(Step S1100-5)
The sub CPU 330a updates various timer counters used in the sub control board 330. Here, the various timer counters are subtracted by 1 each time the sub-timer interrupt processing of the sub-control board 330 is performed, and the subtraction is stopped when it reaches 0, unless otherwise specified.

(Step S1200)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes the command stored in the reception buffer of the sub RAM 330c and performs various processes according to the received command. In the sub-control board 330, when a command is transmitted from the main control board 300, command reception interrupt processing is performed, and the command transmitted from the main control board 300 is stored in the reception buffer. Here, the command stored in the receive buffer is analyzed by the command reception interrupt process. In the present embodiment, when the game machine state is either the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the normal game is not performed. Therefore, the command transmitted from the main control board 300 during the setting change state and the setting confirmation state becomes a command related to the change and confirmation of the set value, and controls the effects other than the setting-related notification effect in the subtimer interrupt processing. Is not done.

(Step S1300)
The sub CPU 330a executes a customer waiting process that controls various effect devices such as the effect display unit 200a, the effect accessory device 202, the effect lighting device 204, and the sound output device 206 in the customer waiting state in which the game is waiting. The details of the waiting-for-customer processing will be described later.

(Step S1400)
The sub CPU 330a clocks the elapsed time of the variation effect executed in the game machine 100, refers to the timetable set for each variation effect, and executes the process corresponding to the corresponding time stored in the timetable. Perform time schedule management processing. Details of the time schedule management process will be described later.

(Step S1500)
The sub CPU 330a executes an input state control process for controlling a state (input state) related to the input operation of the effect operation device 208 (effect button 208a, effect lever 208b, and cross button 218). The details of the input state control process will be described later.

(Step S1600)
The sub CPU 330a executes the effect button detection control process that controls the detection of the input operation (pressing operation) for the effect button 208a constituting the effect operation device 208. The details of the effect button detection control process will be described later.

(Step S1700)
The sub CPU 330a executes an adjustment state control process for controlling a state (adjustment state) related to the adjustment operation of the adjustment button 209 (volume adjustment button 209a, light amount adjustment button 209b). The details of the adjustment state control process will be described later.

(Step S1800)
The sub CPU 330a executes the adjustment button detection control process that controls the detection of the adjustment operation for the adjustment button 209. The details of the adjustment button detection control process will be described later.

(Step S1100-7)
The sub CPU 330a transmits a command set in the transmission buffer of the sub RAM 330c to a designated control unit among the image control unit 340, the voice control unit 350, the lighting control unit 360, and the movable body control unit 370.

(Step S1100-9)
The sub CPU 330a returns the register and ends the sub timer interrupt process.

(Command analysis processing)
FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating a customer waiting command reception process executed when a customer waiting command is received among the above command analysis processes. As described above, the customer waiting command is set on the main control board 300 in step S610-5 of FIG. 33, and then transmitted to the sub control board 330 by the subcommand transmission process (see FIG. 21) of step S200-7. To.

(Step S1210-1)
First, the sub CPU 330a resets the timer value (T) of the customer waiting timer for timing the customer waiting time, which is the elapsed time from the transition to the customer waiting state. Here, resetting means, for example, setting the timer value (T) to "0".

(Step S1210-3)
The sub CPU 330a turns on the customer waiting flag indicating that it is in the customer waiting state, and ends the customer waiting command reception process.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart illustrating a variable command reception process executed when a variable command is received among the above command analysis processes. As described above, the variable command is set in the transmission buffer in steps S611-13 and S611-17 of FIG. 34 on the main control board 300, and is sub-controlled by the subcommand transmission process (see FIG. 21) of step S200-7. It is transmitted to the substrate 330.

(Step S1220-1)
When the sub CPU 330a receives the variable command, the sub CPU 330a first determines in step S1220-1 whether the waiting for customer flag is turned on. As a result, if it is determined that the customer waiting flag is in the on state, the process is moved to step S1221, and if it is determined that the customer waiting flag is not in the on state but in the off state, the process is performed in step S1220-3. To move.

(Step S1221)
The sub CPU 330a executes a customer waiting end process for ending the customer waiting state, and shifts the process to step S1220-3. The customer waiting end process will be described later.

(Step S1220-3)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes the received variation pattern command, stores the variation pattern number included in the variation pattern command, and shifts the process to step S1220-5.

(Step S1220-5)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random numbers (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3, and based on the acquired effect random numbers and the variation pattern number, the latter half variation effect determination table (see FIG. 42B). ) Is used to determine and store the execution pattern (effect mode) of the variation effect in the latter half, and the process is transferred to step S1220-7.

(Step S1220-7)
The sub CPU 330a analyzes the received variable mode command, stores the variable mode number included in the variable mode command, and shifts the process to step S1220-9.

(Step S1220-9)
The sub CPU 330a acquires the effect random numbers (0 to 249) updated in step S1000-3, and based on the acquired effect random numbers and the variation mode number, the first half variation effect determination table (see FIG. 42 (a)). ) Is used to determine and store the execution pattern (effect mode) of the variation effect in the first half, and the process is transferred to step S1220-11.

(Step S1220-11)
The sub CPU 330a sets the time data of the timetable of the variation effect based on the determination of each of the above steps, and shifts the processing to step S1220-13. In the time schedule management process of step S1400, based on the timetable set here, the process of displaying the variable effect image on the effect display unit 200a and the sound of the audio output device 206 corresponding to the variable effect image The effect execution control such as the output process, the lighting control process of the effect lighting device 204, the movable control process of the effect accessory device 202 and the effect operation device 208 is performed. At the time of the effect execution control, the sub CPU 330a transmits a control command including the control contents to the control unit to be controlled among the image control unit 340, the voice control unit 350, the lighting control unit 360, and the movable body control unit 370. To do.

When each control unit receives a control command, each control unit performs an operation based on the control command. Specifically, when the voice control unit 350 receives the control command, the voice control unit 350 executes control for outputting the voice corresponding to the received control command from the voice output device 206 (that is, the speaker). When the lighting control unit 360 receives the control command, the lighting control unit 360 executes control for emitting light corresponding to the received control command by a light source provided in the effect lighting device 204 or the like. When the movable body control unit 370 receives the control command, the movable body control unit 370 executes control for moving the effect button 208a and the effect accessory device 202 in an operation corresponding to the received control command.

(Step S1220-13)
The sub CPU 330a sets the variation effect start flag indicating the start of control related to the variation effect to the ON state, and ends the variation command reception process. The variation effect start flag is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 330c, and indicates that the variation effect control is being executed (variation effect is in progress) when it is in the on state, and when it is in the off state. Indicates that the control of the variation effect is not executed. The variation effect start flag is set to the off state when the sub CPU 330a receives a special symbol stop designation command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart illustrating a customer waiting end process executed when the customer waiting state ends. In the present embodiment, the customer waiting end process is executed in the variable command start process and the effect button detection control process described later.

(Step S1221-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the power saving mode is in progress. The power saving mode is one aspect of the operation mode of the effect device described above, and indicates an operation state in which the power consumption of the game machine 100 due to the operation of the effect device is reduced. The sub CPU 330a is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 330c, and when the power saving mode flag indicating whether or not each effect device is in the power saving mode is on, it is determined that the sub CPU 330a is in the power saving mode and the step is taken. The process is transferred to S1221-3. On the other hand, when the power saving mode flag is off, the sub CPU 330a determines that the power saving mode is not in progress and shifts the process to step S1221-7.

(Step S1221-3)
The sub CPU 330a executes a power saving mode termination process for terminating the power saving mode in each effect device. Specifically, in the power saving mode end processing, the sub CPU 330a creates a power saving mode end command, sets it in the transmission buffer, and shifts the processing to step S1221-5. The power saving mode end command includes, for example, control data for terminating the operating state in which the power consumption of each effect device is minimized and controlling the operating state to the normal operating state. The power saving mode end command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to each control unit of the image control unit 340, the voice control unit 350, the lighting control unit 360, and the movable body control unit 370 in the output control process of step S1100-7. Upon receiving the power saving mode end command, each control unit normally sets each of the effect display unit 200a, the audio output device 206, the effect lighting device 204, and the effect accessory device 202 based on the control data included in the power saving mode end command. Control by mode. The operating state in the normal mode will be described later.

(Step S1221-5)
The sub CPU 330a sets the power saving mode flag to the off state, and shifts the process to step S1221-9.

(Step S1221-7)
The sub CPU 330a executes an image table end process for terminating the demo effect of displaying a predetermined image before the start of the power saving mode while waiting for a customer. The demo production will be described later. Specifically, in the demo effect end process, the sub CPU 330a creates a demo effect end command, sets it in the transmission buffer, and shifts the process to step S1221-9. The demo effect end command set in the transmission buffer is transmitted to each control unit such as the image control unit 340, the voice control unit 350, and the lighting control unit 360 in the output control process of step S1100-7. When the image control unit 340 receives the demo end command, for example, the image control unit 340 hides the predetermined image displayed on the effect display unit 200a in the demo effect. As a result, the effect display unit 200a can display an image related to the effect or the like executed after the demo effect is completed. In addition, the voice control unit 350 and the lighting control unit 360 stop the light emission of the sound and the lighting device that were output during the demonstration production. As a result, it becomes possible to execute the sound and the light emitting mode related to the effect or the like executed after the demo effect.

(Step S1221-9)
The sub CPU 330a sets the customer waiting command to the off state, ends the customer waiting end process, and returns to the caller's process (for example, the variable command reception process (see FIG. 46)).

In the customer waiting state end process, the sub CPU 330a sets the customer waiting flag and the power saving mode flag to the off state. The power saving mode flag is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 330c, and is a flag indicating whether or not each effect device is in the power saving mode. The power saving mode flag indicates that the operating state of the effect device is the power saving mode when it is in the on state, and indicates that the operation mode indicating the operating state of the effect device is not the power saving mode when it is in the off state. The power saving mode will be described later. Further, in the customer waiting end process, the sub CPU 330a creates a customer waiting effect end command for ending the demo effect executed while waiting for the customer, and sets it in the transmission buffer.

FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating a jackpot opening designation command reception process executed when an opening designation command indicating the start of a major game is received among the command analysis processes. As described above, the opening designation command is set in the transmission buffer in step S630-23 of FIG. 36 on the main control board 300, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the subcommand transmission process (see FIG. 21) of step S200-7. Will be done. In the jackpot opening designation command reception process, the mode of the jackpot effect is determined based on the type of the jackpot symbol at the start of the jackpot game.

(Step S1230-1)
In step S1230-1, the sub CPU 330a determines the jackpot effect mode according to the type of the special symbol (big hit symbol), and shifts the process to step S1233-3. When the sub CPU 330a receives the symbol type designation command set in the transmission buffer in the process of step S610-11 of FIG. 33 on the main control board 300, the sub CPU 330a acquires the jackpot symbol information from the command and determines the predetermined design of the sub RAM 330c. I remember it in the area. In the game machine 100, for each of the jackpot symbols A to D, a unique jackpot effect in which the display mode of the effect display unit 200a, the sound output mode of the sound output device 206, and the movable mode of the effect accessory device 202 are different is prepared. There is. When the sub CPU 330a reads the jackpot symbol stored in the sub RAM 330c, the sub CPU 330a acquires the jackpot effect mode corresponding to the jackpot symbol from the predetermined jackpot effect determination table held in the sub ROM 330b, and determines the jackpot effect mode.

(Step S1230-3)
In step S1230-3, the sub CPU 330a sets the time data of the time table corresponding to the determined jackpot effect mode, and shifts the process to step S1230-5. Based on the timetable set here, in the time schedule management process of step S1400 described above, a process of displaying a jackpot effect image (including a moving image) corresponding to the jackpot symbol on the effect display unit 200a, or a jackpot effect image. The effect execution control such as the sound output process of the sound output device 206, the lighting control process of the effect lighting device 204, and the movable control process of the effect accessory device 202 and the effect operation device 208 is performed. Further, as will be described in detail later, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, in order to exert the original effect of the jackpot effect, the player outputs from the audio output device 206 by adjusting the adjustment button 209 during the jackpot effect. It is regulated (for example, stopped) to adjust the sound to be played (for example, BGM, character dialogue sound, etc.) and the brightness of the effect display unit 200a. On the other hand, during the jackpot production, a period (specific period) during which the adjustment operation is allowed is temporarily provided. In the present embodiment, this specific period may also be included in the time data. Thereby, the start and end of the specific period can be controlled by the time schedule management process.

(Step S1230-5)
In step S1230-5, the sub CPU 330a sets the jackpot start flag indicating the start of control related to the jackpot effect to the ON state, and ends the jackpot opening designation command reception process. The jackpot start flag is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 330c, and indicates that the control of the jackpot effect is being executed when it is on (the jackpot effect is being performed), and when it is off, it indicates that the jackpot effect is being performed. Indicates that the production control is not being executed. The jackpot start flag is set to the off state when the sub CPU 330a receives a post-major game state change designation command indicating a game state set after the end of the major role game from the main control board 300 at the end of the ending time. Will be done. When the game state change setting change state specification command after the major role is set in the transmission buffer in step S670-5 of FIG. 41, it is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the subcommand transmission process (see FIG. 21) of step S200-7. To.

FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating a setting-related end specification command reception process executed when a setting-related end specification command indicating that the setting change state or the setting confirmation state is terminated is received among the above command analysis processes. .. As described above, the setting-related end designation command is set in the transmission buffer in step S410-19 of FIG. 24 on the main control board 300, and is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the subcommand transmission process of step S200-7.

(Step S1240-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not it is the end timing of the setting change state. Specifically, the sub CPU 330a analyzes the received setting-related end designation command, and determines which end timing is the setting change state or the setting confirmation state. When the sub CPU 330a determines that it is the end timing of the setting change state based on the analysis of the setting-related end designation command, the process shifts to step S1240-3. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 330a determines that it is not the end timing of the setting change state but the end timing of the setting confirmation process based on the analysis of the setting-related end designation command, the process shifts to step S1240-3.

(Step S1240-3)
The sub CPU 330a sets the setting change state flag to the off state, and shifts the process to step S1240-7.

(Step S1240-5)
The sub CPU 330a sets the setting confirmation status flag to the off state, and shifts the process to step S1240-7.

(Step S1240-7)
The sub CPU 330a sets the setting-related notification end command indicating that the setting-related notification effect is terminated based on the end of the setting change state or the setting confirmation state in the transmission buffer, and shifts the process to step S1240-9. The setting-related notification end command is transmitted to each effect device of the image control unit 340, the voice control unit 350, and the lighting control unit 360 in the output control process of step S1100-7. When each effect device receives the setting suggestion end command, each effect device ends the operation related to the setting-related notification effect.

(Step S1240-9)
The sub CPU 330a executes the initialization process of the effect device to end the setting-related end designation command reception process. The initialization process of the effect device in this step is the same process as the initialization process in step S1000-13 of the sub CPU initialization process (see FIG. 43).

(Processing while waiting for customers)
FIG. 50 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a customer waiting process (step S1300) executed in the sub timer interrupt process (see FIG. 44) of the sub control board 330. The customer waiting process is the execution of a demonstration effect of displaying a predetermined image on the effect display unit 200a while the game is waiting (during the customer waiting state), and the effect in the power saving mode for reducing the power consumption of the game machine 100. This is a process for controlling the operation of the device. The power saving mode is an aspect of the operation mode for controlling the operating state of the effect device.

In the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the game machine state is the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the main CPU 300a does not execute the special symbol change waiting process (see FIG. 33) for the customer waiting command. Therefore, the customer waiting command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 330 in the setting change state in which the setting change process is being executed. Therefore, the effect device is not controlled in the power saving mode during the execution of the setting change process. Similarly, the effect device is not controlled in the power saving mode even in the setting confirmation state in which the setting confirmation process is being executed.

(Step S1300-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the customer is waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 330a determines that the customer is waiting when the customer waiting flag is on, and shifts the process to step S1300-3. On the other hand, when the customer waiting flag is off, the sub CPU 330a determines that the customer is waiting, ends the customer waiting process, and returns to the sub timer interrupt process.

(Step S1300-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the power saving mode is in progress. Specifically, the sub CPU 330a is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 330c, refers to a power saving mode flag indicating whether or not each effect device is in the power saving mode, and the power saving mode flag is in the ON state. In this case, it is determined that the power saving mode is in progress, the customer waiting process is terminated, and the process returns to the subtimer interrupt process (see FIG. 44). On the other hand, when the power saving mode flag is off, the sub CPU 330a determines that the power saving mode is not in progress and shifts the process to step S1300-5.

(Step S1300-5)
The sub CPU 330a increments the timer value (T) of the customer waiting timer (adds 1 in this example), and shifts the process to step S1300-7.

(Step S1300-7)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not it is the start timing of the power saving mode. The game machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured to start controlling the effect device in the power saving mode after a predetermined period from the start of the customer waiting state. For example, the sub CPU 330a refers to the timer value (T) of the customer waiting timer, and determines that it is the start timing of the power saving mode when a predetermined time (customer waiting expiration time) has elapsed from the start of the customer waiting state. The process is transferred to step S1300-11. On the other hand, when the customer waiting expiration time has not elapsed from the start of the customer waiting state, the sub CPU 330a determines that it is not the start timing of the power saving mode and shifts the process to step S1300-9.

(Step S1300-9)
The sub CPU 330a executes the power saving mode start process, and shifts the process to step S1300-11. Specifically, the sub CPU 330a creates a power saving mode start command for starting control of the operating state of the effect device in the power saving mode in the power saving mode start process, and sets the command in the transmission buffer. The power saving mode start command includes, for example, control data for controlling each effect device to an operating state in which power consumption is minimized. The power saving mode start command is transmitted to each control unit (image control unit 340, voice control unit 350, lighting control unit 360, and movable body control unit 370) in the output control process of step S1100-7. When each control unit receives the power saving mode start command, each of the effect display unit 200a, the audio output device 206, the effect lighting device 204, and the effect accessory device 202 saves power based on the control data included in the power saving mode start command. Control by mode. The operating state of the effect device in the power saving mode will be described later.

(Step S1300-11)
The sub CPU 330a sets the power saving mode flag to the ON state, ends the customer waiting process, and returns to the sub timer interrupt process (see FIG. 44).

(Step S1300-13)
Based on the determination that it is not the start timing of the power saving mode in the process of step S1300-7, the sub CPU 330a executes the demo effect start process for starting the demo effect, ends the customer waiting process, and interrupts the sub timer. Return to processing. The demo effect is, for example, an effect in which a predetermined demo image (for example, an introduction of a model of the game machine 100 or a demo image showing a character) indicating that a game is waiting is displayed on the effect display unit 200a. In the demonstration effect, the game machine 100 may output a predetermined sound from the sound output device 206, BGM, or the like, emit light in a predetermined mode of the effect lighting device 204, or the like.

The sub CPU 330a creates, for example, a demo image display start command indicating that the display of the demo image is started in the demo effect start process, and sets the command in the transmission buffer. The demo image display start command is transmitted to the image control unit 340 in the output control process of step S1100-7. When the image control unit 340 receives the demo image display start command, the image control unit 340 displays a predetermined demo image on the effect display unit 200a. As a result, a demo effect in which a demo image is displayed is started while waiting for customers. The demonstration effect is repeatedly executed from the start of the customer waiting state until the power saving mode is started after a predetermined time has elapsed.

Next, the time schedule management process (step S1400) in the subtimer interrupt process (see FIG. 44) will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the time schedule management process.

(Step S1400-1)
First, the sub CPU 330a adds the counter value of the fluctuation time timing timer to update the execution time of the fluctuation effect.

(Step S1400-3)
The sub CPU 330a refers to the timetable set during the execution of the variation effect, sets various commands in the transmission buffer, and turns various flags ON / OFF according to the current execution time of the variation effect. Executes the control processing to be performed, ends the time schedule management processing, and returns to the subtimer interrupt processing.

For example, in step S1400-3 of the time schedule management process, the sub CPU 330a refers to the time table and controls various effects executed in accordance with the fluctuation effects. The effect includes, for example, an operation effect (an effect that prompts the player to perform at least one input operation of each configuration of the effect operation device 208 and operates the effect device based on the input operation) and a predetermined advance notice effect. Is done. For example, when controlling the operation effect, the sub CPU 330a refers to the timetable, and when it is determined that it is the start timing of the operation effect, the sub CPU 330a sets the operation effect flag indicating whether or not the operation effect is executed to the ON state. Further, the sub CPU 330a refers to the timetable and sets the operation effect start flag to the off state when it is determined that it is the end timing of the operation effect. As a result, the sub CPU 330a can execute the control related to the operation effect during the period when the operation effect flag is on (operation effect execution period).

Further, for example, the sub CPU 330a refers to the timetable in step S1400-3 of the time schedule management process, and adjusts the effect device (in this example, the sound output device 206 and the effect display device 200) during the jackpot effect. Controls the start and end of a specific period, which is an acceptable period. Specifically, when the sub CPU 330a refers to the timetable and determines that it is the start timing of the specific period, the sub CPU 330a sets the specific period start flag indicating the start of the specific period to the ON state. Further, the sub CPU 330a refers to the timetable and sets the specific period end flag to the off state when it is determined that it is the end timing of the specific period. As a result, the sub CPU 330a adjusts the output (volume and brightness) of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 by the adjustment operation of the adjustment button 209 during the period (specific period) in which the specific period start flag is on. Control can be performed.

Next, the input state control process (step S1500) in the subtimer interrupt process (see FIG. 44) will be described. FIG. 52 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the input state control process. In the input state control process, the main control board 300 determines the input state indicating whether or not the input operation of each configuration of the effect operation device 208 (effect button 208a, effect lever 208b, and cross button 218) can be accepted, or the sub This is a process of controlling based on the state of execution control of the effect on the control board 330.

(Step S1500-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the current game machine state is the setting change state. When the setting change state flag is on, the sub CPU 330a determines that the current game machine state is the setting change state, and shifts the process to step S1500-7. On the other hand, when the setting change state flag is off, the sub CPU 330a determines that the current gaming state is not the setting change state, and shifts the process to step S1500-3.

(Step S1500-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not an error has occurred in the game machine 100. For example, the sub CPU 330a receives an error occurrence command indicating the occurrence of an error from the main control board 300, and if the error cancellation command is not received, determines that an error is occurring and shifts the process to step S1500-7. .. The error occurrence command is set in the transmission buffer in step S400-21 (see FIG. 23) of the main control board 300, and then transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the subcommand transmission process (see FIG. 21) in step S200-7. To. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the error occurrence command has not been received or the error release command has been received and no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1500-5. The error generation command is set in the transmission buffer in step S400-21 (see FIG. 23) of the main control board 300, and then transmitted to the sub control board 330 in the same manner as the error generation command.

When the sub CPU 330a receives the error generation command, the sub CPU 330a uses an effect device such as the effect display device 200, the effect lighting device 204, and the sound output device 206 to notify the error (an example of notification of a specific mode). To perform control of. The error notification effect is, for example, an effect of notifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal state) by operating the effect device in a mode different from the normal effect mode. The error notification effect ends when the error release command is received and the error is released. Therefore, in this example, the occurrence of an error corresponds to the execution of the error notification effect. Further, the error notification effect may end after a predetermined time from the occurrence of the error.

(Step S1500-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the variation effect is being executed. For example, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the variation effect start flag is on and the control related to the variation effect is started, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1500-7. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the variation effect start flag is off and the control related to the variation effect has not been started, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1500-9.

(Step S1500-7)
The sub CPU 330a sets the first input permission flag to the off state and ends the input state control process. When the first input permission flag is on, the input state of each configuration (effect button 208a, effect lever 208b, and cross button 218) of the effect operation device 208 is permitted (allowed) for the player or the like to accept the input operation. It indicates that the state is in the input state (input enable state), and when it is in the off state, it indicates that the input state is a state in which acceptance of an input operation by a player or the like is restricted (input restricted state). The first permission flag is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 330c. In this example, the input restriction state indicates a state in which the reception of input operations is stopped in principle. By setting the first permission flag to the off state in this step, the input state of each configuration of the effect operation device 208 is subsequently set to the input restriction state.

(Step S1500-9)
The sub CPU 330a sets the first input permission flag to the on state and ends the input state control process. As a result, thereafter, the input state of each configuration of the effect operation device 208 is set to the input enable state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game machine state is the setting change state (YES in step S1500-1), the input state of the effect operation device 208 is the input restricted state, and the acceptance of the input operation is restricted (this example). Then stop). Further, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the game machine state is other than the setting change state (YES in step S1500-3 or YES in step S1500-5), the input state of the effect operation device 208 is the input restricted state. Become.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned input state control process (see FIG. 52), the effect operation device 208 is restricted from accepting an input operation by a player or the like when a predetermined condition (input restriction condition) is satisfied. It is set to the input restriction state, and when the above input restriction condition is not satisfied, it is set to the input enable state in which the player or the like is allowed to accept the input operation. Further, this input state control process is executed for each subtimer interrupt process. Therefore, when the input restriction condition is not satisfied (released), the input state of the effect operation device 208 is promptly shifted to the input enable state. Similarly, when the input restriction condition is satisfied, the input state of the effect operating device 208 is promptly shifted to the input restriction state.

As shown in FIG. 52, the input restriction conditions include that the game machine state is in the setting change state (first condition), that an error is occurring (second condition), or that the fluctuation effect is being produced (first condition). (Three conditions) are included, and when at least one of these three conditions is satisfied (when any one of steps S1500-1 to S1500-5 is YES), the effect operating device 208 is in the input restricted state. (Step S1500-7). That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of input restricting conditions (three of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition in this example) are set in the game machine 100, and the sub CPU 330a is among the plurality of input restricting conditions. Based on the fact that at least one is satisfied, the input state of the effect operating device 208 is set as the input restricted state. In the present invention, the input restriction conditions are not limited to the above three. The input restriction condition may include the setting change state (first condition), and the input restriction condition may be three or more or three or less.

Here, among the above three input restriction conditions, the input restriction state when the above-mentioned first condition is satisfied, that is, when the game machine 100 is executing the setting change process (setting change state), is set. It is called a special input restricted state. On the other hand, the effect operation device when the above-mentioned first condition is not satisfied and the above-mentioned second condition (error is occurring) or third condition (variation effect is being produced) is satisfied. The input restricted state of 208 is usually referred to as an input restricted state.

Since the special input restricted state is an input state set in association with the above-mentioned setting change process using the setting key, it is set at the time of power recovery or ram clearing on the main control board 300. That is, the special input restriction state is not set during a normal game or during a game standby (when the game machine state is a game-enabled state).

On the other hand, the normal input restriction state is set when an error occurs (the second condition is satisfied) or the variation effect is started (the third condition is satisfied) during the normal game, and the setting change process is being executed (setting change). It is not set in the state). In addition, the normal input restriction state ends when all of the above-mentioned first condition, second condition, and third condition are not satisfied, and thereafter, when the second condition or third condition is satisfied again during the game. It will be set again. That is, the normal input restricted state and the input enable state can be reversibly shifted during the game. On the other hand, the special input restriction state in the portable device is terminated at a predetermined timing after the setting change processing is completed (for example, the execution timing of the input state control processing), and unless the setting change processing is executed again thereafter There is no transition from the input enabled state or the normal input restricted state to the special input restricted state.

Further, in the normal input restricted state, a state in which acceptance of the input operation of the effect operating device 208 is limitedly permitted (limited permission state) may occur. The limited permission state indicates a state in which the input operation of the effect operation device 208 can be accepted in a state in which the input operation is limited in time or function during the input restriction state. In this example, a limited permission state is generated during the execution of the operation effect executed in accordance with the variable effect. On the other hand, the limited permission state does not occur in the special input restricted state. That is, in the special input restricted state, the reception of input operations is always restricted.

Further, when none of the above three input restriction conditions is satisfied in the present embodiment (NO in steps S1500 to 1 to 5), the input state of the effect operating device 208 becomes an input enable state (step S1500). -9). Since the input operation to the effect operation device 208 is accepted in the input enable state, the sub CPU 330a can perform control such as operating the effect device in response to the input operation of the effect operation device 208. In the game machine 100, the period during which the input is possible and the limited permission state corresponds to the operation valid period of the effect operation device 208.

In the present embodiment, input states (input enable state or normal input restricted state) other than the special input restricted state that can be set other than the setting change state (setting change processing is being executed) are collectively referred to as "normal input state". ".

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 330a performs detection control of the input operation to the effect operation device 208 according to the input state of the effect operation device 208 set in the input state control process. As a result, in the game machine 100, input control is performed based on the input state of the effect operation device 208.

Next, as an example of the input detection control process of the effect operation device 208 based on the input state, the effect button detection control process (step S1600) in the subtimer interrupt process (see FIG. 44) will be described. FIG. 53 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the effect button detection control process. The effect button detection control process is an input detection control process related to the effect button 208a of the effect operation device 208.

(Step S1600-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the input state of the effect operation device 208 is an input enable state. When the sub CPU 330a determines that the first permission flag is on and the input state of the effect operating device 208 is the input enable state, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1600-7. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the first permission flag is off and the input state of the effect operation device 208 is the input restriction state, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1600-3.

(Step S1600-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the input state of the effect operation device 208 is the special input restricted state among the input restricted states. When the sub CPU 330a determines that the first permission flag is off and the setting change state flag is on and is in the special input restriction state, the effect button detection control process is performed without executing the processes after step S1600-5. Is terminated and the process returns to the subtimer interrupt processing. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the first permission flag is in the off state and the setting change state flag is in the off state and is in the normal input restriction state, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1600-5.

(Step S1600-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the operation effect is being executed. Specifically, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the operation effect start flag is on and the operation effect is being executed, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1600-7. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the operation effect start flag is off and the operation effect is not being executed, the sub CPU 330a ends the effect button detection control process without executing the processes after step S1600-7, and interrupts the sub timer. Return to processing. As will be described in detail later, during the execution of the operation effect in the present embodiment, the input state of the effect operation device 208 is a limited permission state in which the input operation can be received in a limited manner even in the input restricted state.

(Step S1600-7)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the effect button 208a has been input (pressed in this example). Specifically, the sub CPU 330a determines that the effect button 208a has been input-operated when the detection signal is input from the button operation detection switch s1, and shifts the process to step S1600-9. On the other hand, the sub CPU 330a determines that the effect button 208a has not been input when the detection signal has not been input from the button operation detection switch s1, ends the effect button detection control process, and processes the steps S1600-9 and subsequent steps. Return to the subtimer interrupt processing (see FIG. 44) without executing. As described above, in the present embodiment, the detection of the input operation to the effect operation device 208 (in this example, the effect button 208a) is performed based on the input state of the effect operation device 208 being the input enable state or the limited permission state. Will be executed. That is, the process of this step S1600-7 corresponds to the operation detection process of the effect button 208a.

(Step S1600-9)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the customer is waiting. When the sub CPU 330a determines that the customer waiting flag is on and is currently waiting for a customer, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1600-11. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the customer waiting flag is off and is not currently waiting for a customer, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1610 without executing step S1600-11.

(Step S1600-11)
The sub CPU 330a executes the customer waiting end process. Since the customer waiting end process executed here is the same as the customer waiting end process (FIG. 47) executed in step S1221 of the variable command reception process (FIG. 46), the description thereof will be omitted.

(Step S1610)
The sub CPU 330a executes an input operation control process for controlling the operation of each effect device based on the input operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 208a, ends the effect button detection control process, and returns to the sub timer interrupt process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 330a controls whether or not the input operation for the effect button 208a is detected based on the input state of the effect operation device 208. Further, in the effect button detection control process, the sub CPU 330a controls the operation of the effect device according to the operation mode related to whether or not the operation corresponding to the detection of the input operation is possible. Here, the operation modes of the effect device include a special mode that regulates the operation based on the input operation of the effect operation device 208 while the input state is in the special regulation state, that is, the setting change process is being executed, and the special regulation state. It includes a normal mode in which an operation based on the input operation can be tolerated except in the middle, that is, in a state where the setting change process is not executed.

That is, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the effect device does not execute the special mode for restricting the operation based on the input operation of the effect operation device 208 and the setting change process when the setting change process is executed. The operation is controlled based on an operation mode including a normal mode in which the operation based on the input operation is acceptable.

Specifically, the sub CPU 330a performs an input operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 208a when the input state of the effect operation device 208 is a special input restricted state (NO in step S1600-1 → YES in step S1600-3). ) Is not executed (step S1600-7), and the operation of the effect device based on the input operation is not controlled. This series of control corresponds to the operation control of the effect device by the special mode. That is, in the present embodiment, the special mode is an operation mode based on the special input restricted state. By controlling the effect device based on the special mode, the operation based on the input operation (for example, pressing operation) of the effect operation device 208 (for example, the effect button 208a) is regulated.

Further, when the input state of the effect operation device 208 is not the special input restriction state (YES in step S1600-1 or NO in step S1600-3), the sub CPU 330a controls the effect device in the normal mode. Here, the control of the effect device in the normal mode includes a normal permission pattern and a normal regulation pattern. When the input state of the sub CPU330a is an input enable state (YES in step S1600-1), or when the input state is a limited permission state (NO in step S1600-1 → NO in step S1600-3 → step S1600- In YES) of 5, the detection process (step S1600-7) of the input operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 208a is executed, and when the input operation of the effect button 208a is performed, the operation of the effect device based on the input operation. Control is performed (flow from YES in step S1600-7 to step S1610). This series of control corresponds to the operation control of the effect device by the normal mode of the normal permission pattern.

That is, in the present embodiment, the normal mode of the normal permission pattern is an operation mode based on the input enable state or the limited permission state in the normal input restriction state. By controlling the effect device in the normal mode of the normal permission pattern, for example, an operation based on an input operation (pressing operation) of the effect button 208a is permitted.

Further, when the input state is not the normal input restricted state and the limited permission state (NO in step S1600-1 → NO in step S1600-3 → NO in step S1600-5), the sub CPU330a has an effect button as in the special mode. The input operation (pressing operation) detection process (step S1600-7) of 208a is not executed, and the operation control of the effect device based on the input operation is not performed. This series of control corresponds to the operation control of the effect device by the normal mode of the normal regulation pattern.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the type of operation mode (special mode) based on the flow of detection control of the effect operation device 208 (in this example, the effect button 208a) depending on whether the game machine state is the setting change state. Or normal mode) is different. In the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, among the operation modes of the effect device, the normal mode includes a normal permission pattern and a normal regulation pattern, and the two patterns can be reversibly shifted. That is, the effect device may shift from the normal permission pattern in which the operation based on the input operation of the effect operation device 208 is permitted in the normal mode to the normal regulation pattern in which the operation based on the input operation is restricted. On the contrary, the effect device may shift from the normal regulation pattern to the normal permission pattern.

On the other hand, the game machine 100 does not reversibly shift between the normal mode and the special mode. Specifically, the game machine 100 has a special operation mode based on the execution of the setting change process. Further, at a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process (for example, the input state control process (see FIG. 52)), the operation mode becomes the normal mode. That is, the operation mode shifts from the special mode to the normal mode at a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process. Further, the operation mode does not shift from the normal mode to the special mode unless the setting change processing is executed again after the setting change processing is completed. Further, in the present embodiment, the operation modes of the effect device (effect display device 200, effect accessory device 202, effect lighting device 204, and sound output device 206) include the above-mentioned power saving mode. The power saving mode is a mode that can be set when a customer waiting state occurs as described above, and is an aspect of a normal mode different from the normal permission pattern and the normal regulation pattern.

In this example, the effect button 208 detection control process has been described as an example of the detection control process of the input operation to the effect operation device 208, but other configurations (effect lever 208b and cross button 218) constituting the effect operation device 208 have been described. ), The detection control process of the input operation is executed in the same manner as the effect button 208a. That is, in the detection control processing of each of the effect lever 208b and the cross button 218, the operation control of the effect device is performed in the operation mode based on the input state as in the effect button 208a. Therefore, the description of the detection control process of the input operation related to each configuration of the effect lever 208b and the cross button 218 is omitted.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the special mode and the normal mode in the normal regulation pattern, the regulation of the operation of the effect device based on the input operation of the effect operation device 208 means the operation corresponding to the input of the effect operation device 208. Indicates that it should not be done. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game machine 100 may limit the operation of the effect device corresponding to the input operation of the effect operation device 208 as a regulation of the operation of the effect device based on the input operation in the normal mode in the normal regulation pattern. In this case, when the operation of the effect device is restricted, the game machine 100 regulates the operation of some of the various effect devices (for example, the effect display device 200) based on the input operation of the effect button 208a. , Other effect devices may be configured to allow operation based on the input operation of the effect button 208a.

Next, input-time effect operation control processing for controlling the operation of the effect device (effect display device 200, effect accessory device 202, effect lighting device 204, and sound output device 206) based on the input operation of the effect operation device 208. (Step S1610) will be described. FIG. 54 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the input-time effect operation control process. In the present embodiment, the input-time effect operation control process is a process of controlling the operation of the effect device based on the normal mode. Therefore, the input-time effect operation control process is executed when the input state of the effect operation device 208 is the input enable state or the limited permission state.

(Step S1610-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the game machine state is the setting confirmation state. When the sub CPU 330a determines that the setting confirmation status flag is in the ON state, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1610-3. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the setting change state flag is in the off state, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step 1610-5.

(Step 1610-3)
Based on the fact that the effect button 208a is pressed during the setting confirmation state, the sub CPU 330a executes an administrator menu display process for displaying an administrator menu screen (not shown) on the effect display unit 200a, and performs an input effect operation. The control process is terminated, and the process returns to the effect button detection control process (FIG. 53). The administrator menu screen is a menu screen that can be used by the employees of the game store while the setting is confirmed, and it is possible to set the time of the game machine, view the change history of the set value, and the like. The sub CPU 330a creates an administrator menu display command in the administrator menu display process and sets it in the transmission buffer. The administrator menu display command is set in the transmission buffer and then transmitted to the image control unit 340 in the output control process of step S1100-7. When the image control unit 340 receives the administrator menu display command, the image control unit 340 controls to display the image corresponding to the administrator menu screen on the effect display unit 200a.

The sub CPU 330a controls to display the administrator menu when the effect button 208a is continuously input for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) (long press operation) in order to prevent the display of the administrator menu due to an erroneous operation. May be done. In this case, the sub CPU 330a may use, for example, a predetermined timer (administrator menu timer) to time the duration of the input operation of the effect button 208a. The sub CPU 330a may refer to the timer value of the administrator menu timer in the administrator menu display process, and create an administrator menu display command when it is determined that the input operation of the effect button 208a is continued for a predetermined time.

(Step S1610-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the operation is being produced. When the operation effect start flag is on, the sub CPU 330a determines that the operation effect is in progress and shifts the process to step S1610-7. On the other hand, when the operation effect start flag is off, the sub CPU 330a determines that the operation effect is not in progress and shifts the process to step S1610-9.

(Step S1610-7)
When the sub CPU 330a creates an effect button operation command based on the input operation of the effect button 208a during the operation effect and sets it in the transmission buffer, the sub CPU 330a ends the input effect effect control process and performs the effect button detection control process. Return to (FIG. 53). After being set in the transmission buffer, the effect button operation command is transmitted to each control unit (image control unit 340, voice control unit 350, lighting control unit 360, and movable body control unit 370) in the output control process of step S1100-7. Will be done. For example, when the image control unit 340 receives the effect button operation command during the operation effect, the image control unit 340 displays an image corresponding to the input operation of the effect button 208a on the effect display unit 200a. Further, for example, the voice control unit 350 may output the voice or BGM corresponding to the input operation of the effect button 208a from the audio output device 206 based on the reception of the effect button operation command, and the lighting control unit 360 may operate the effect button. The effect lighting device 204 may emit light in a mode (for example, emission color) corresponding to the input operation of the effect button 208a based on the reception of the command. Further, the movable body control unit 370 may operate the effect accessory device 202 in an operation mode corresponding to the input operation of the effect button 208a based on the reception of the effect button operation command. The sub CPU 330a may transmit an effect button operation command to only a part of each control unit (for example, only the image control unit 340 or other than the movable body control unit 370) depending on the mode of the operation effect. Good.

As described above, the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment accepts the input operation of the effect button 208a corresponding to a specific effect (for example, operation effect) when the operation mode of the effect device is the normal mode in the normal regulation pattern. Therefore, the effect operation of the effect device based on the input operation can be executed. The present invention is not limited to this, and the game machine 100 executes the effect operation of the effect device based on the input operation with the input state of the effect operation device 208 as the limited permission state during the execution of a predetermined effect other than the operation effect. It may be configured to be possible. Further, in the game machine 100, when the operation mode is the normal mode in the normal regulation pattern, the effect accompanied by the reproduction of a specific effect (for example, a moving image (animation image or the like) on the effect display unit 200a) different from the operation effect. Etc.) may not be accepted for the input operation of the effect operation device 208 during execution, and the operation of the effect device based on the input operation may be restricted.

(Step S1610-9)
The sub CPU 330a executes an actual machine custom display process for displaying an actual machine custom screen (not shown) on the effect display unit 200a based on the input operation of the effect button 208a other than during the operation effect, and controls the effect operation at the time of input. The process ends and the process returns to the effect button detection control process. The actual machine custom screen is a menu screen that can be used by the player during the game or while the game is waiting. On the actual machine custom screen, the mode of a predetermined effect (for example, a look-ahead effect based on special 1 hold and special 2 hold (hold information)), appearance frequency, type of character appearing in the effect, and the like can be selected. Further, in the actual machine custom, it is possible to select the movable mode of the effect accessory device 202, the presence / absence of air blown from the air blowing mechanism (not shown) according to the predetermined effect, and the like. That is, the actual machine custom is, for example, a menu for the player to customize the production mode of the game machine during the game.

The sub CPU 330a creates an actual machine custom display command and sets it in the transmission buffer in the actual machine custom display process. After being set in the transmission buffer, the actual machine custom display command is transmitted to the image control unit 340 in the output control process of step S1100-7. When the image control unit 340 receives the actual machine custom display command, the image control unit 340 controls to display the image corresponding to the actual machine custom screen on the effect display unit 200a.

(Example of input state and operation mode transition)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 to 54, an example of the transition of the input state of the effect operation device 208 and the operation mode of the effect device in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 55. FIG. 55 is a time chart for explaining the input state of the effect operating device 208 and the transition of the operation mode of the effect device in chronological order. Specifically, the time axis shown in the first stage of FIG. 55 shows the passage of time in the period from the time t0 to the time t8 after the lapse of a predetermined period from left to right. Further, the second stage of FIG. 55 shows the transition of the game machine state of the game machine 100 in chronological order. Further, in the third row of FIG. 55, the transition of the execution status of the variation effect is shown in chronological order. Further, the fourth stage of FIG. 55 shows the transition of the error occurrence status in the game machine 100 in chronological order. That is, in the second to fourth stages of FIG. 55, the state of establishment of the input restriction condition related to the determination of the input state of the effect operating device 208 is shown. Further, the fifth row of FIG. 55 shows the transition of the input state according to the establishment status of the input restriction condition in chronological order. Further, the sixth stage of FIG. 55 shows the transition of the operation modes of the effect devices (effect display device 200, effect accessory device 202, effect lighting device 204, and audio output device 206) according to the input state in chronological order. ing.

In this example, when the power-on mode is the setting change mode (the mode when the power is turned on with the intention of changing the set value), the input state of the effect operation device 208 and the transition of the operation mode of the effect device. Will be explained in chronological order.

As shown in the second stage of FIG. 55, when the power is turned on at time t0, the game machine state is in the setting change state, and as shown in the third stage of FIG. 55, the variation effect is not executed (non-execution). .. Further, at time t0, no error has been detected in the game machine 100 (no error). That is, at time t0, the first condition among the input restriction conditions is satisfied. Therefore, as shown in the fifth stage of FIG. 55, the input state of the effect operating device 208 is set to the special input restricted state at time t0, and accordingly, as shown in the sixth stage of FIG. 55, the effect device The operation mode is a special mode.

Hereinafter, the flow of control related to the determination of the input state and the operation mode at the time t0 shown in FIG. 55 will be described. For example, at time t0, an employee of the game store turns on the game machine 100 in the setting change mode (the state where the inner frame 104 is opened, the setting key is changed, and the RAM clear button 305 (see FIG. 4) is pressed). To do. As a result, the main CPU 300a executes the initialization process at the time of RAM clear in the CPU initialization process (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and sends the RAM clear designation command including the game machine state type indicating the setting change state to the transmission buffer. Store (YES in step S100-17 → YES in step S100-43 → flow of step S100-51). As a result, in step S200-7 of the main loop process (see FIG. 21), the RAM clear designation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

Next, the sub CPU 330a receives the RAM clear designation command and executes the sub CPU initialization process (see FIG. 43). Specifically, the sub CPU 330a executes the initial setting process (step S1000-1), and determines that it has received the RAM clear designation command including the game machine state type indicating the setting change state (step S1000-3). YES), set the setting change status flag to the on status (step S1000-5). As a result, the sub CPU 330a can execute the control according to the setting change state. Further, the sub CPU 330a creates a setting-related notification command including setting type information indicating the setting change state and sets it in the transmission buffer. The setting-related notification command is transmitted to each control unit in step S1100-7 of the first subtimer interrupt process (see FIG. 44) after the power is turned on at time t0. As a result, the setting-related notification effect (setting change state notification effect) for notifying that the setting change state has occurred is executed. The details of the setting change status notification effect will be described later.

Further, since the game machine state of the game machine 100 is the setting change state at time t0, the command related to the game is not transmitted from the main control board 300. Therefore, the sub CPU 330a has not received the variation command (variation mode command, variation pattern command) indicating the start of the variation display of the special symbol. Therefore, in the first sub-timer interrupt process after the time t0, the sub CPU 330a does not execute the variable command reception process (see FIG. 46) in the command analysis process (step S1200). As a result, as shown in the third stage of FIG. 55, the execution control of the variation effect is not started at the time t0.

Further, at time t0, since the main CPU 300a is in the setting change state, the error management process (step S400-21) for determining an error or the like is not executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) (step S410). → Flow of steps S400-29). Therefore, as shown in the fourth stage of FIG. 55, the occurrence of an error is not detected at time t0, and the error notification (error notification effect) using the effect device is not performed.

Further, in the input state control process (see FIG. 52) during the first sub-timer interrupt process after the time t0, the sub CPU 330a determines that the setting is in the changed state (YES in step S1500-1), and the first input permission flag. Is set to the off state (step S1500-7). As a result, as shown in the second stage of FIG. 55, the game machine state is the setting change state (setting change processing is in progress) at time t0, that is, the first condition of the input restriction condition is satisfied. , The input state of the effect operating device 208 is set to the special input restricted state among the input restricted states (see the fifth stage of FIG. 55).

Next, in the effect button detection control process (see FIG. 53) of the effect operation device detection control process, the sub CPU 330a determines that the input state of the effect operation device 208 is the special input restricted state (NO in step S1600-1). → YES in step S1600-3), the effect button detection control process is terminated without executing the operation detection process (step S1600-7) of the effect button 208a. As a result, at time t0, the operation mode of the effect device becomes the special mode based on the fact that the input state is the special input restricted state, that is, the setting change state (see the sixth stage in FIG. 55). That is, the sub CPU 330a controls the operation of the effect device in a special mode that regulates the operation corresponding to the input operation of the effect operation device 208, at least during the period in which the setting change state (the setting change process is being executed).

In the operation control of the effect device by the special mode based on the setting change state, the operation corresponding to the input operation of the effect operation device 208 is restricted, so that the operation detection process of the effect button 208a described above (step S1600-7) is performed. The process for detecting the input operation is not executed. As a result, the game machine 100 prevents unnecessary input operations other than the input related to the setting change (for example, inputting the set value by pressing the RAM clear button 305) in a state where the set value can be changed, and causes an input error or the like. Can be reduced. Therefore, the game machine 100 can improve the input accuracy of the set value in a state where the set value can be changed.

Here, an example of the setting change state notification effect starting at time t0 will be described with reference to FIG. 56. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing an example of a mode of setting change state notification effect for notifying the occurrence of a setting change state. For example, when the image control unit 340 receives the setting-related notification command created in the sub CPU initialization process (see FIG. 43), the image control unit 340 notifies that a setting change state has occurred based on the setting type information. An image (setting change notification image) is displayed on the effect display unit 200a. In this example, as shown in FIG. 56, a character string image "setting is being changed" is displayed as an example of the setting change notification image. For example, the image control unit 340 sets the background color of the effect display unit 200a to black (dark color) and displays the setting change notification image in white at the time of the setting change state notification effect. In addition, in FIG. 56, the black background color in the effect display unit 200a is illustrated by dot-like shading as a base. The same applies to FIGS. 57 and 59, which will be described later.

Further, when the voice control unit 350 receives the setting-related notification command, it outputs a warning sound (for example, a buzzer sound) notifying that the setting change state has occurred. Further, when the lighting control unit 360 receives the setting-related notification command, the lighting control unit 360 installs a frame lighting device (not shown) so as to surround the exposed portion of the game board 108 in the effect lighting device 204 and the front frame 106 (see FIG. 2). It is lit with a predetermined emission color (for example, red). The lighting control unit 360 may turn off the effect lighting device 204 and turn on only the frame lighting device at the time of setting change state notification effect. In this way, the game machine 100 can clearly notify that the setting change process is being executed by executing the setting change state notification effect in the setting change state.

Returning to FIG. 55, at the time t1 after the lapse of a predetermined time from the time t0, the setting change state ends and the game machine state changes to the game-enabled state. Hereinafter, the flow of control related to the determination of the input state and the operation mode at time t1 will be described.

Specifically, at time t1, an employee of the amusement store performs a return operation of the setting key, and the setting change process is completed. Therefore, in the set value-related processing at time t1 (see FIG. 24), the main CPU 300a has detected a return operation of the setting key (switching of the input signal from the setting key switch 180s from the on state to the off state). Based on, a setting-related end specification command indicating that the setting change state is terminated is set in the transmission buffer, and a value indicating the game-enabled state is set in the game machine status flag (NO in step S410-17 → step S410-). 19 → Flow of steps S410-27). In this way, the setting is changed based on the fact that the setting key return operation (an example of a specific operation) is performed, specifically, the main CPU 300a (an example of the setting changing means) detects the setting key return operation. The state (an example of a state in which the setting change process can be executed) ends, and the game machine state shifts to a game-enabled state in which a normal game can be performed.

The setting-related end specification command set in the transmission buffer at time t1 is the sub-control board by the subcommand transmission process (see FIG. 21) in step S200-7 during the main loop process (see FIG. 21) executed at time t2. Sent to 330. That is, there is a time interval between the end of the setting change state on the main control board 300 and the time when the sub CPU 330a recognizes the end of the setting change state by receiving the setting-related end designation command. The passage of time in the period from time t1 to time t2 is very short (about several milliseconds), but in the first stage of FIG. 55, it is set between time t1 and time t2 for easy understanding. It is shown at intervals.

In this example, the predetermined period from the time t1 to the time t2 is referred to as a game machine state transition period. In the second stage of FIG. 55, the transition period of the gaming machine state in which the transition of the gaming machine state to the playable state is not transmitted to the sub-control board 330 is indicated by diagonal lines. During the game machine state transition period, the sub CPU 330a does not recognize the change in the game machine state. Therefore, as shown in the fifth stage of FIG. 55, the input state is maintained in the special input restricted state at the time t1 as in the time t0. Similarly, as shown in the sixth stage of FIG. 55, the operation mode is maintained in the special mode at time t1.

At the time t2 when the game machine state transition period ends, a setting-related end designation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. Hereinafter, the flow of control related to the determination of the input state and the operation mode at time t2 will be described. The sub CPU 330a executes the setting-related end designation reception process (see FIG. 49) based on the reception of the setting-related end designation command. Specifically, the sub CPU 330a determines that it is the end timing of the setting change state by analyzing the setting-related end designation command (YES in step S1240-1), sets the setting change state flag to the off state (step S1240-). 3), a setting-related notification end command is created, set in the transmission buffer (step S1240-7), and the effect device initialization process is performed (step S1240-9). As a result, the setting change state notification effect (see FIG. 56) ends at time t2.

Further, at time t2, since the game is not performed by the player, the control related to the variation effect is not executed (see the third stage in FIG. 55). Further, at time t2, no error has occurred in the game machine 100, and the main CPU 300a has not detected an error in the error management process (step S400-21) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) (FIG. See the fourth row of 55). Therefore, at time t2, the error notification (error notification effect) using the effect device is not performed. From this, in the input state control process (see FIG. 52) at time t2, the sub CPU 330a determines that the game state is not the setting change state (NO in step S1500-1), and determines that no error has occurred (step S1500-). 3 NO), it is determined that the control related to the variation effect has not been started (step S1500-5NO), and the first input permission flag is set to the ON state. In this way, as shown in the second stage of FIG. 55, the game machine state is in the game-enabled state (setting change processing is not in progress) at time t2, no error has occurred, and the variation effect is not being executed. That is, the input state of the effect operating device 208 is set to the input enable state based on the fact that all three input restriction conditions are not satisfied.

Further, in the effect button detection control process (see FIG. 53) at time t2, the sub CPU 330a determines that the input state of the effect operation device 208 is in an inputtable state (YES in step S1600-1), and the effect button 208a inputs. An operation detection process for determining whether or not an operation (pressing operation) has been performed is executed (step S1600-7). As a result, based on the fact that the input state becomes the input enable state at the time t2, the operation mode of the effect device becomes the normal mode according to the normal permission pattern (see the sixth stage in FIG. 55). That is, the sub CPU 330a controls the operation of the effect device in the normal mode that allows the operation corresponding to the input operation of the effect operation device 208, at least during the period in which the game is possible (the setting change process is not in progress).
In this example, at time t2, the effect button 208a is not pressed. Therefore, the sub CPU 330a determines in the effect button detection control process that the effect button 208a has not been input-operated (NO in step S1600-7), and ends the effect button detection control process.

As described above, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the input state of the effect operation device 208 becomes the special input restriction state based on the execution of the setting change process at the time t0, and after the setting change process at the time t1 is completed, the game machine At time t2, which is the end timing of the state transition period, the state shifts from the special input restricted state to the input enable state. Further, in the game machine 100, the operation mode of the effect device becomes a special mode based on the execution of the setting change process at the time t0, and is the time that is the end timing of the game machine state transition period after the end of the setting change process at the time t1. At t2 (an example of a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process), the mode shifts from the special mode to the normal mode with the normal permission pattern. That is, the operation mode of the effect device shifts according to the transition of the input state of the effect operation device 208. Further, as described above, the game machine state transition period is extremely short in the present embodiment. Therefore, substantially immediately after the return operation of the setting key is detected on the main control board 300 and the setting change state is completed, the setting-related end specification command is received on the sub control board 330 and the control based on the setting change state is performed. It ends and the control based on the playable state is started. That is, the operation mode of the effect device shifts from the special mode to the normal mode with the normal permission pattern at the timing immediately after the setting change state is completed on the main control board 300.

Further, as described above, the game machine state transition period occurs when the main CPU 300a detects the return operation of the setting key and sends the setting-related end designation command when the setting change state is terminated. That is, the input state of the effect operation device 208 is maintained in the special input restricted state unless the return operation of the setting key is performed (specifically, unless the main CPU 300a detects the return operation of the setting key). .. Similarly, the operation mode of the effect device is maintained in the special mode unless the return operation of the setting key is performed (unless the main CPU 300a detects the return operation of the setting key).

Further, at a predetermined timing in the period from time t2 to time t3, the sub CPU 330a receives a customer waiting command from the main control board 300. The customer waiting command is set in the transmission buffer based on the fact that neither the special 1 hold nor the special 2 hold is stored in the special symbol change waiting process (see FIG. 33) (step S610-5). Upon receiving the customer waiting command, the sub CPU 330a resets the customer waiting timer in the customer waiting command reception process (FIG. 45) (step S1210-1) and sets the customer waiting flag to the ON state (step S1210-3). .. Further, in the customer waiting process (see FIG. 50), the sub CPU 330a determines that the customer is waiting (YES in step S1300-1), and determines that the effect device is not in the power saving mode (NO in step S1300-3). ), The timer value of the customer waiting timer is added by 1 (step S1300-5), it is determined that the customer waiting expiration time has not elapsed since the start of the customer waiting state (step S1300-NO), and the demonstration effect is started. (Step S1300-13). As a result, for example, in the effect display unit 200a, a demo effect in which a predetermined demo image is displayed is started.

At the start of the demonstration effect after a predetermined time from time t2, the game machine state is maintained in the game-enabled state and is not in the setting change state (NO in step S1500-1), and no error has occurred (step). S1500-3 NO), no variation effect is executed (NO in step S1500-5). That is, all three input restriction conditions are not satisfied, and the first input permission flag is set to the ON state (step S1500-9). Therefore, at the start of the demonstration effect, the input state of the effect operation device 208 is maintained in the input enable state, and the operation mode of the effect device is maintained in the normal mode in the normal permission pattern.

At time t3, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the demo production after time t2, the game machine state is maintained in the game-enabled state and is not in the setting change state (NO in step S1500-1), and an error also occurs in the game machine 100. It has not occurred (NO in step S1500-3), and the variation effect has not been executed (NO in step S1500-5). That is, all three of the input restriction conditions are not satisfied as in the case of the start of the demonstration effect, and the first input permission flag is set to the ON state (step S1500-9). Therefore, at time t3, the input state of the effect operating device 208 is maintained in the input enable state (see the fifth stage of FIG. 55), and accordingly, at time t3, the operation mode of the effect device is the normal mode in the normal permission pattern. (See the 6th row in FIG. 55).

Further, at time t3, the customer waiting expiration time has been reached because a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the demonstration production after time t2. Therefore, in the customer waiting process (see FIG. 50) at time t3, the sub CPU 330a determines that the customer waiting expiration time has elapsed and it is the start timing of the power saving mode (YES in step S1300-7), and the power saving mode is started. The process is executed (step S1300-9).

The sub CPU 330a sets the power saving mode start command in the transmission buffer in the power saving mode start processing in step S1300-9. When each control unit receives the power saving mode start command, each control unit performs control in the power saving mode that reduces the power consumption of each effect device. Along with this, at time t3, the operation mode of the effect device becomes a power saving mode that operates in an operation mode that reduces power consumption (see the sixth stage in FIG. 55). As a result, at time t3, the operation mode of the effect device is a state in which the normal mode in the normal permission pattern and the power saving mode are in parallel. That is, in the parallel state of the power saving mode and the normal mode in the normal permission pattern, the sub CPU 330a controls the operation of the effect device so as to reduce the power consumption and allow the operation based on the input operation of the effect operation device 208. ..

As described above, when the game machine state of the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a game-enabled state, the effect device (effect display device 200, effect accessory device 202, effect lighting device 204, and audio output device 206) saves power. It is possible to shift to the mode, and operation control based on the power saving mode can be performed. On the other hand, when the game machine state is the setting change state or the setting confirmation state, the customer waiting command is not transmitted to the sub-control board 330, and the customer waiting state is not waited for. Therefore, the effect device does not shift to the power saving mode in the setting change state (during the execution of the setting change process). Further, the effect device does not shift to the power saving mode even in the setting confirmation state. When the power saving mode flag is set to the ON state in the customer waiting process (see FIG. 50), the sub CPU 330a ends the customer waiting process and returns to the sub timer interrupt process (see FIG. 44).

Here, an example of the mode of each effect device in the power saving mode will be described with reference to FIG. 57.
In this example, for example, when the image control unit 340 receives the power saving mode start command, the background color of the effect display unit 200a is set to black (dark color), and an image (power saving notification image) for notifying that the power saving mode is set is displayed in white. To do. Here, in the power saving mode, the brightness of the backlight (not shown) of the effect display device 200 may be reduced to the minimum. At this time, the brightness control value may be set to a value (lower limit value) even smaller than the minimum value that can be set by the player, or the brightness of the effect display unit 200a is temporarily set by a control different from the setting of the brightness control value. The brightness for the power saving mode (extremely low brightness) may be set. In this example, as shown in FIG. 57, the character string image "Power saving is in progress" is displayed as an example of the power saving notification image. Further, in the power saving mode, the image control unit 340 displays an auxiliary message image indicating a method of returning from the power saving mode together with the power saving notification image. In this example, as an example of the auxiliary message image, the character string image "Return when the effect button is pressed" is displayed.

As described above, in the power saving mode, control by the normal mode in the normal permission pattern is also performed in parallel as the operation mode of the effect device (in this example, the effect display device 200). Therefore, when the effect button 208a is pressed in the power saving mode, the effect button 208a is detected in step S1600-7 of the effect button detection control process (see FIG. 53), and the customer waiting end process is performed in step S1600-11. Is executed and the power saving mode ends.

In this way, the power consumption related to the operation of the effect display device 200 in the power saving mode is reduced as compared with the case of displaying the demo image during the demo effect, the variable effect, and the jackpot effect, for example. Further, in the power saving mode, the image control unit 340 may set the brightness of the effect display unit 200a to the minimum value. Also in this case, if the background color is black and the power saving notification image is white, the power saving notification image and the auxiliary message image can be sufficiently visually recognized. Further, the image control unit 340 may control to turn off the backlight of the liquid crystal display device constituting the effect display device 200 in the power saving mode.

Further, for example, when the voice control unit 350 receives the power saving mode start command, it controls to stop the voice output at the time of the demonstration effect (silence control). As a result, the power consumption related to the operation (audio output) of the audio output device 206 is reduced in the power saving mode. Further, for example, the lighting control unit 360 controls to turn off at least a part of the effect lighting device 204 and the frame lighting device (not shown). As a result, the brightness due to the light emission of the effect lighting device 204 and the frame lighting device is suppressed in the power saving mode, so that the power consumption related to the operation (light emission) of the effect lighting device 204 and the frame lighting device is reduced. The game machine 100 may be configured to turn off all the effect lighting device 204 and the frame lighting device (not shown) in the power saving mode. Further, for example, the movable body control unit 370 controls to return the effect accessory device 202 and the effect button 208a to the initial positions to stop the movement. As a result, the power consumption of the effect accessory device 202 is reduced. When the effect accessory device 202 and the effect button 208a are not movable in the demonstration effect, the movable body control unit 370 does not have to perform the control triggered by the power saving mode start command.

In this way, by controlling the effect device based on the power saving mode, the operation of each effect device is in a mode of reducing power consumption. As a result, the game machine 100 can reduce the power consumption while the game is on standby, and thus reduce the operating cost of the game machine in the game store.

It is assumed that a player who visits a game store presses the effect button 208a on the game machine 100 in the power saving mode at the time t4 when a predetermined time elapses from the time t3. As a result, as shown in the sixth stage of FIG. 55, the parallel state of the power saving mode and the normal mode in the normal permission pattern ends as the operation mode of the effect device, and only the normal mode in the normal permission pattern is maintained.

Specifically, in the effect button detection control process (see FIG. 53) at time t4, the sub CPU 330a determines that the input state of the effect operation device 208 is an input enable state (YES in step S1600-1), and the effect button. It is determined that 208a has been input-operated (YES in step S1600-7), it is determined that the customer is currently waiting (YES in step S1600-9), and the customer waiting end process is executed (step S1600-11). Here, the customer waiting end process executed by the effect button detection control process is the same as the customer waiting process (see FIG. 47) in step S1221. Therefore, in the customer waiting end processing at time t4, the sub CPU 330a determines that the power saving mode is in progress (YES in step S1221-1), creates a power saving mode end command, and sets the command in the transmission buffer (step S1221-3). , The waiting customer flag is set to the off state (step S1221-9).

When each control unit receives the power saving mode end command, each control unit ends the control of each effect device (effect display unit 200a, effect accessory device 202, effect lighting device 204, and audio output device 206) in the power saving mode, and ends the control in the power saving mode. Return to control by itself. As a result, each effect device ends the operation mode in the power saving mode (see FIG. 57) and returns to the default operation mode (default operation mode) in the normal mode. As a default operation mode in the normal mode, for example, the effect symbols 210a, 210b, 210c are displayed in the effect display unit 200a of the effect display device 200 in the default stop display mode. Further, for example, a predetermined sound or BGM corresponding to the default operation mode may be output from the sound output device 206, or the effect lighting device 204 may be lit in a lighting mode corresponding to the default operation mode. Further, the movable mode corresponding to the default operation mode of the effect accessory device 202 may be a mode of waiting at the initial position or a mode of moving to a predetermined position.

When the power saving mode of the effect device ends in the game machine 100, the operation may shift to the default mode in the normal mode immediately after the end, or may shift to the default mode through the demo effect.

Further, at time t4, as with time t3, all three of the above-mentioned input restriction conditions are not satisfied. Therefore, at time t4, the input state of the effect operating device 208 is maintained in the input enable state (see the fifth stage of FIG. 55), and accordingly, at time t4, the operation mode of the effect device is normally set to the permitted pattern. It is maintained in the normal mode (see the sixth stage in FIG. 55).

As shown in FIG. 55, in the period from the time t2 to the end of the time t4 (time t5), the operation mode of the effect device is changed from the normal mode in the simple normal permission pattern to the normal mode and the power saving mode in parallel. It shifts to the state, and shifts to return to the normal mode with a simple normal permission pattern again. That is, it is possible to reversibly transition between the parallel state of the power saving mode and the normal mode and the state of the normal mode alone. On the other hand, as described above, the operation mode of the effect device does not shift to the power saving mode in the setting change state. Therefore, the operation mode of the effect device does not shift from the special mode to the power saving mode, and similarly changes from the power saving mode to the special mode. Does not migrate.

It is assumed that after the time t4, the player starts the game of launching the game ball in the game machine 100, and at the time t5, for example, the game ball enters the first starting port 120. As a result, as shown in the third stage of FIG. 55, the variation effect is started. Further, with the start of the variable effect, the input state of the effect operation device 208 shifts to the normal input restricted state (see the fifth stage in FIG. 55), and in response to this, the operation mode of the effect device depends on the normal regulation pattern. The mode shifts to the normal mode (see the sixth stage in FIG. 55).

Specifically, at time t5, the main CPU 300a performs a large winning combination lottery based on the ball entering the first starting port 120 in the special symbol change waiting process (see FIG. 33) (YES in step S610-3 → step S610). -9 flow), the special symbol variation number determination process (step S611) is executed. The main CPU 300a sets a variation mode command based on the major winning combination lottery result (loss in this example) in the transmission buffer in the special symbol variation number determination process (see FIG. 34) (step S611-13), and changes based on the major winning combination lottery result. The pattern command is set in the transmission buffer (step S611-17). The variable command (variable mode command, variable pattern command) is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the sub-command transmission process (see FIG. 21) in step S200-7.

Based on the reception of the variable command, the sub CPU 330a executes the variable command reception process (FIG. 46). Specifically, the sub CPU 330a determines that the customer waiting flag is not in the on state but in the off state (NO in step S1220-1), and based on the variation pattern command, the execution pattern of the variation effect in the latter half (effect mode). (Step S1220-3 → flow of step S1220-5), and the execution pattern (effect mode) of the first half of the variation effect is determined based on the variation mode command (step S1220-7 → flow of step S1220-9). , The time data of the timetable of the variation effect is set (step S1220-11), and the variation effect start flag is set to the ON state (step S1220-13). As a result, as shown in the third stage of FIG. 55, the control related to the variation effect is executed at the time t5.

In addition, since the control related to the fluctuation effect is started, the third condition of the input restriction condition (that the variation effect is in progress) is satisfied. Further, at time t5, no error occurred in the game machine 100 as at time t4. Therefore, the sub CPU 330a has not received the error occurrence command, and the effect device does not notify the error. Therefore, in the input state control process at time t5 (FIG. 53), the sub CPU 330a determines that the control related to the variation effect has been started (YES in step S1500-5), and turns off the first input permission flag. Set (step S1500-7). As described above, the first input permission flag is turned off as the game machine state is in the game-enabled state, the error is not notified, and the variation effect is started. Therefore, at time t5, the input state of the effect operating device 208 is set to the normal input restricted state (see the fifth stage in FIG. 55).

Further, in the effect button detection control process (FIG. 53) at time t5, the sub CPU 330a determines that the input state of the effect operation device 208 is the normal input restricted state (NO in step S1600-1 → step S1600-3). NO), and it is determined that the operation effect is not executed in the variation effect started at time t5 and the limited permission state is not obtained (NO in step S1600-5), and the operation detection process of the effect button 208a (step 1600-7). ) Is not executed, and the effect button detection control process is terminated. As a result, as the input state of the effect operating device 208 is set to the normal input restricted state, the operation mode of the effect device shifts from the normal permitted pattern in the normal mode to the normal restricted pattern (6th stage in FIG. 55). reference). In this example, the start of the variable effect (the third condition is satisfied) is an example of an opportunity to shift the normal regulation pattern to the normal mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, the operation mode of the effect device is the effect device based on the input operation of the effect operation device 208 (in this example, the effect button 208a) due to the occurrence of a predetermined transition trigger during the normal mode. There is a case where the operation of is shifted to a normal regulation pattern that can be regulated.

As shown in the second stage of FIG. 55, at the time t6, which is a predetermined time after the time t5, the variation effect indicating that the major winning combination lottery result is lost ends. Specifically, a special symbol stop designation command indicating that the special symbol has been stopped and displayed is transmitted from the main control board 300, and the sub CPU 330a sets the variation effect start flag to the off state. Further, at time t6, it is assumed that no error has occurred in the game machine 100 (an error generation command has not been transmitted to the sub-control board 330). As a result, at time t6, similarly to time t2 to t4, all three input restriction conditions related to the determination of the input state of the effect operating device 208 are not satisfied (stages 2 to 4 in FIG. 55). As a result, at time t6, the input state of the effect operating device 208 returns from the normal input restricted state to the input enable state (see the fifth stage in FIG. 55). Further, as the input state becomes the input enable state at time t6, the operation mode of the effect device returns from the normal mode of the normal regulation pattern to the normal mode of the normal permission pattern (see the sixth stage of FIG. 55).

As described above, the normal regulation pattern in the normal mode is based on the fact that the input state shifts from the normal input regulation state to the input enable state, that is, all of the first to third input regulation conditions are not satisfied. And finish. Here, when the second condition is not satisfied (when no error has occurred), the change from the satisfied state to the unsatisfied state of the third condition, that is, the end of the variation effect, is the normal regulation pattern end condition (specification). Corresponds to an example of the state end condition). That is, the normal regulation pattern in the normal mode ends at an end trigger (end of the variable effect) different from the above-mentioned transition trigger (for example, the start of the variable effect). In other words, the normal mode of the normal regulation pattern started with the start of the variation effect ends with the lapse of the execution time of the variation effect. Therefore, the normal regulation pattern end condition also includes the passage of a predetermined time (in this example, the execution time of the variation effect). The sub CPU 330a may determine the end of the normal regulation pattern by the arrival of the end trigger, may determine by the passage of a predetermined time, or combine both the arrival of the end trigger and the passage of the predetermined time. You may judge.

That is, in the normal regulation pattern, when no error has occurred in the game machine 100 and the error notification has not been executed in the effect device (NO in step S1500-3), the normal regulation pattern end condition is satisfied. End based on. Further, in the normal mode in the normal permission pattern after the end of the normal regulation pattern, the operation detection process (step S1600-7) is executed, so that the effect operation device 208 (in this example, the effect button 208a) is executed in the effect device. The operation based on the input operation (pressing operation) of is allowed.

As shown in the fourth stage of FIG. 55, it is assumed that an error occurs in the game machine 100 at the time t7 after the lapse of a predetermined time from the time t6. Along with this, the input state of the effect operation device 208 shifts from the input enable state to the normal input restriction state, and the operation mode of the effect device shifts from the normal mode of the normal permission pattern to the normal mode of the normal regulation pattern. That is, the fact that an error has occurred (the second condition is satisfied) is an example of an opportunity to shift the normal regulation pattern to the normal mode.

Specifically, at time t6, for example, it is assumed that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 134 and the tank is full, and a full tank command is transmitted to the main control board 300. As a result, the main CPU 300a detects an error (in this example, a lower plate full tank error) in the error management process (step S400-21) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and sets the error occurrence command in the transmission buffer. .. The error occurrence command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the sub-command transmission process (see FIG. 21) in step S200-7.

Based on the reception of the error occurrence command, the sub CPU 330a executes the error command reception process (not shown) in the command analysis process (step S1200), and notifies the error in the effect device (error notification effect) at time t7. Start. At this time, for example, the sub CPU 330a creates an error notification effect start command and sets it in the transmission buffer. Each control unit that has received the error notification effect start command operates the effect device in the error notification mode based on the control data included in the command.

Further, when the error occurrence command is received and the control related to the error notification effect is started, the second condition of the input restriction condition (the error is occurring) is satisfied. Therefore, in the input state control process at time t7 (see FIG. 53), the sub CPU 330a determines that an error is occurring and the error notification is being executed (YES in step S1500-3), and the first input permission flag Is set to the off state (step S1500-7). As described above, the first input permission flag is turned off according to the game machine state being the game-enabled state and the error notification being performed. Therefore, at time t7, the input state of the effect operating device 208 is set to the normal input restricted state as at time t5 (see the fifth stage of FIG. 55).

Further, in the effect button detection control process (FIG. 53) at time t7, the sub CPU 330a operates the effect device as the input state of the effect operation device 208 is set to the normal input restricted state, as at time t5. The mode shifts from the normal permission pattern in the normal mode to the normal regulation pattern (see the sixth stage in FIG. 55).

Further, as shown in the second stage of FIG. 55, at time t8, which is a predetermined time after time t7, the error that occurred at time t7 (in this example, the lower plate full tank error) is cleared. Specifically, at time t7, the main CPU 300a determines that the full tank state of the lower plate 134 has been released in the error management process (step S400-21) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), and transmits an error release command. Set in the buffer. The error occurrence command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 by the sub-command transmission process (see FIG. 21) in step S200-7.

Based on the reception of the error release command, the sub CPU 330a executes the error command reception process (not shown) in the command analysis process (step S1200), and notifies the error started at time t7 (error notification effect). finish. For example, the sub CPU 330a creates an error notification effect end command and sets it in the transmission buffer. Each control unit that has received the error notification effect end command causes the effect device to end the operation in the error notification mode based on the control data included in the command.

In addition, the second condition of the input restriction condition (that an error is occurring) is not satisfied because the error release command is received at the time t8 after the lapse of a predetermined time from the time t7 and the control related to the error notification effect is terminated. Become. Further, at time t8, the game machine state is maintained in the game-enabled state, and the control related to the variation effect is not started. As a result, at time t8, as with time t2 to t4 and time t6, all three input restriction conditions related to the determination of the input state of the effect operating device 208 are not satisfied (stages 2 to 4 in FIG. 55). As a result, at time t8, the input state of the effect operating device 208 returns from the normal input restricted state to the input enable state (see the fifth stage in FIG. 55). Further, as the input state becomes the input enable state at time t8, the operation mode of the effect device returns from the normal mode of the normal regulation pattern to the normal mode of the normal permission pattern (see the sixth stage of FIG. 55). As a result, in the effect device, the operation based on the input operation (pressing operation) of the effect operation device 208 (in this example, the effect button 208a) is allowed.

Thus, at time t8, as at time t6, the normal regulation pattern in the normal mode is that the input state shifts from the normal input regulation state to the input enable state, that is, the first condition to the third of the input regulation conditions. It ends based on the failure of all of the conditions. Here, the fact that the second condition is not satisfied (the error is cleared) and the third condition is not satisfied (the fluctuation effect is not being performed) corresponds to an example of the normal regulation pattern end condition. That is, the normal regulation pattern in the normal mode ends with an end trigger (clearing the error in this example) different from the above-mentioned transition trigger (in this example, the occurrence of an error).

In the present invention, the normal regulation pattern end condition may include that the game ball passes through a predetermined area on the game area 116 (see FIG. 2). As a result, the game machine 100 can end the normal mode of the normal regulation pattern regardless of the input regulation condition related to the determination of the input state of the effect operation device 208. The predetermined area may be, for example, a gate 124 in which the passage of a game ball triggers a lottery of a normal symbol. Further, in the game machine 100, a specific area (not shown) is provided in which the passage of the game ball serves as a trigger for starting a round game constituting a major game (the trigger for the operation of the first prize opening and the second prize 128). If so, the specific area may be a predetermined area related to the normal regulation pattern end condition. Further, in the game machine 100, the gate 124 may also serve as a specific area.

Further, at the time t9 after the lapse of a predetermined time from the time t8, the variation effect is started again. At time t9, the game machine state is a game-enabled state, and no error has occurred in the game machine 100. Therefore, at time t9, the input state of the effect operating device 208 is set to the normal input restricted state as the variation effect is started (see the fifth stage of FIG. 55). Further, at time t9, as the input state of the effect operation device 208 is set to the normal input restriction state, the operation mode of the effect device shifts from the normal permission pattern in the normal mode to the normal regulation pattern (FIG. 55). See the 6th row).

Here, for example, it is assumed that an operation effect for urging the player to operate the effect button 208a is executed during the variation effect after a lapse of a predetermined time from the time t9. Specifically, at this time, it is assumed that the operation effect start flag is set to the ON state in step S1400-3 of the time schedule management process (see FIG. 51).

In this case, the sub CPU 330a determines in the effect button detection control process (FIG. 53) that the input state of the effect operation device 208 is the normal input restricted state (NO in step S1600-1 → NO in step S1600-3). Further, in the variation effect started at time t5, it is determined that the operation effect is being executed and the input state is the limited permission state (YES in step S1600-5), and the operation detection process of the effect button 208a (step 1600-). Execute 7). As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 330a determines that the input state of the effect operation device 208 is the limited permission state, for example, when the operation effect is being executed, and the effect operation device 208 (in this example, the effect button 208a). ) Can be accepted only within the execution time of the operation effect. In the limited permission state accompanying the execution of the operation effect, the execution of the operation effect is completed, and the operation effect start flag is set to the off state in step S1400-3 of the time schedule management process (see FIG. 51). It ends and the input state returns to the normal input restricted state.

Further, as shown in FIG. 55, the variation effect started at time t9 ends at time t10. At this time, it is assumed that no error has occurred in the game machine 100 as in the time t6. As a result, at time t10, the input state of the effect operation device 208 becomes an input-enabled state from time t2 to time t4 and times t6 and t8. Along with this, at time t10, the operation mode of the effect device becomes the normal mode in the normal permission pattern as in the time t2 to time t4 and time t6 and t8.

In this way, the input state of the effect operation device 208 becomes the special input restricted state based on the execution of the setting change process, and the predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process (in this example, the game state transition period at time t2). Unless the special input restricted state is changed to the normal state (input enable state or normal input restricted state) other than the special input restricted state at the end timing) and the setting change process is executed again after the setting change process is completed, that is, the game machine. As long as the state is maintained in the playable state, the normal state does not shift to the special input restricted state.

Further, the operation mode of the effect device controlled based on the input state becomes a special mode based on the execution of the setting change process, and the game state shifts to the predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process (in this example, the game state shifts at time t2). As long as the special mode is changed to the normal mode at the end timing of the period) and the setting change process is not executed again after the end of the setting change process, that is, as long as the game machine state is maintained in the playable state, the normal mode is special. Does not switch to mode.

That is, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the input state of the effect operation device 208 is an input enable state or a normal state based on the establishment state of the three input restriction conditions as long as the game machine state is maintained in the game enable state. It repeatedly shifts to the input restricted state. Further, as long as the game machine state is maintained in the playable state, the operation mode of the effect device repeatedly shifts to the normal permission pattern in the normal mode or the normal regulation pattern. Further, while waiting for a customer, the normal mode and the power saving mode in the normal permission pattern may be in a parallel state.

As described with reference to FIG. 55, in the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the effect device is controlled in a special mode in which the operation based on the input operation is regulated in the setting change state in which the setting change process can be executed. In a state where the setting change process cannot be executed (setting confirmation state or game enable state), the operation based on the input operation is controlled based on the allowable normal mode. In addition, the operation mode becomes a special mode based on the execution of the setting change process. Further, the operation mode shifts from the special mode to the normal mode (normal permission pattern or normal regulation pattern) at a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process. In addition, the operation mode does not shift from the normal mode to the special mode unless the setting change processing is executed again after the setting change processing is completed. That is, in the game machine 100, the operation mode of the effect device is changed to the special mode during the execution of the setting change process (when the setting value is changed), so that unnecessary input operations may be prevented and an input error or the like may occur. Can be reduced. Therefore, the game machine 100 can improve the input accuracy of the set value in a state where the set value can be changed.

Next, another example of the transition of the input state of the effect operating device 208 and the operation mode of the effect device according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a time chart for explaining the transition of the input state of the effect operating device 208 and the operation mode of the effect device in chronological order as in FIG. 55. Note that FIG. 58 shows that the game state is the setting confirmation state from time t0 to time t1, that is, the power-on mode is the setting confirmation mode (mode when the power is turned on with the intention of confirming the set value). In some respects, it differs from FIG. 55. That is, the input state of the effect operation device 208 and the transition state of the operation mode of the effect device shown in FIG. 58 are different from the example shown in FIG. 55 only at the time t2 when the game machine state transition period ends from the time t0. ..

As shown in the second stage of FIG. 58, when the power is turned on at time t0, the game machine state is the setting confirmation state, and as shown in the third stage of FIG. 58, the variation effect is not executed (non-execution). .. Further, at time t0, no error has been detected in the game machine 100 (no error). That is, at time t0, all three input restriction conditions are not satisfied. Therefore, as shown in the fifth stage of FIG. 58, the input state of the effect operating device 208 is set to the input enable state at time t0, and accordingly, the operation of the effect device is set as shown in the sixth stage of FIG. The mode is the normal mode with the outpatient permission pattern.

Hereinafter, the flow of control related to the determination of the input state and the operation mode at the time t0 in the setting confirmation state shown in FIG. 58 will be described. For example, at time t0, the employee of the game store powers the game machine 100 in the setting confirmation mode (the state in which the inner frame 104 is opened, the setting key is changed, and the RAM clear button 305 (see FIG. 4) is not pressed). Is thrown in. As a result, the main CPU 300a executes the subcommand transmission process (step S100-25) to the sub-control board in the CPU initialization process (see FIGS. 19 and 20), and transmits the power return designation command indicating the setting confirmation status. Set in the buffer. As a result, in step S200-7 of the main loop process (see FIG. 21), the power return designation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330.

Next, the sub CPU 330a receives the power return designation command and executes the sub CPU initialization process (see FIG. 43). Specifically, the sub CPU 330a executes the initial setting process (step S1000-1), and determines that the sub CPU 330a has received the power recovery designation command including the game machine state type indicating the setting confirmation state (step S1000-3). NO → YES in step S100-7), the setting confirmation status flag is set to the on state (step S1000-9). As a result, the sub CPU 330a can execute the control according to the setting confirmation state.

Further, the sub CPU 330a creates a setting-related notification command including setting type information indicating the setting confirmation status and sets it in the transmission buffer. The setting-related notification command is transmitted to each control unit in step S1100-7 of the first subtimer interrupt process (see FIG. 44) after the power is turned on at time t0. As a result, the setting-related notification effect (setting confirmation state notification effect) for notifying that the setting confirmation state has occurred is executed. The details of the setting confirmation status notification effect will be described later.

Further, at the time t0 in the setting confirmation state, the game machine 100 does not transmit a command related to the game from the main control board 300 as in the time t0 in the setting change state (see FIG. 55). Therefore, the execution control of the variation effect is not started at the time t0 in the setting confirmation state (see the third stage of FIG. 58). Further, at the time t0 in the setting confirmation state shown in FIG. 58, the main CPU 300a does not execute the error management process (step S400-21) as in the setting change state. Therefore, as shown in the fourth stage of FIG. 58, the occurrence of an error is not detected at time t0 in the setting confirmation state, and the error is not notified using the effect device.

Therefore, in the input state control process (see FIG. 52) during the first sub-timer interrupt process after the time t0 in the setting confirmation state, the sub CPU 330a determines that all three input restriction conditions are not satisfied (step S1500-). 1 NO → NO in step S1500-3 → NO flow in step S1500-5), the first input permission flag is set to the ON state (step S1500-9). As a result, as shown in the fifth stage of FIG. 58, the input state of the effect operation device 208 is set to the input enable state at the time t0 in the setting confirmation state.

Next, in the effect button detection control process (see FIG. 53) at time t0 in the setting confirmation state, the sub CPU 330a determines that the input state of the effect operation device 208 is an input enable state (YES in step S1600-1). An operation detection process for determining whether or not the effect button 208a has been input (pressed) is executed (step S1600-7). As a result, based on the fact that the input state can be input at time t0 in the setting confirmation state, the effect device (effect display device 200, effect accessory device 202, effect lighting device 204, and sound output device 206) The operation mode is the normal mode according to the normal permission pattern (see the sixth stage in FIG. 58).

That is, the sub CPU 330a is not a special mode that regulates the operation corresponding to the input operation of the effect operation device 208, but is not a special mode that regulates the operation corresponding to the input operation of the effect operation device 208, at least during the period of the setting confirmation state (the setting confirmation process is being executed), but the normal mode (normally permitted in this example). The operation of the effect device is controlled by the pattern).

Here, an example of the setting confirmation state notification effect starting at the time t0 during the setting confirmation will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing an example of the mode of the setting confirmation state notification effect for notifying the occurrence of the setting confirmation state. For example, when the image control unit 340 receives the setting-related notification command created in the sub CPU initialization process (see FIG. 43), the image control unit 340 notifies that the setting confirmation state has occurred based on the setting type information. An image (setting confirmation notification image) is displayed on the effect display unit 200a. As shown in FIG. 59, in this example, as shown in FIG. 59, a character string image "setting is being confirmed" is displayed as an example of the setting confirmation notification image. Further, in the control of the setting confirmation status notification effect, the image control unit 340 displays a menu display message image indicating the display method of the administrator menu together with the setting confirmation notification image. In this example, as an example of the menu display message image, a character string image "press and hold the effect button to enter the administrator menu" is displayed to notify that the administrator menu can be displayed by pressing and holding the effect button 208a. Has been done.

As described above, while the setting confirmation process is being executed (setting confirmation state), the effect device is controlled in the normal mode in the normal permission pattern. For example, an employee of a game store presses and holds the effect button 208a for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) or longer at a timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the time t0 in the setting confirmation state and the setting confirmation state is maintained. And. In this case, in the effect button detection control process (see FIG. 53), the sub CPU 330a determines that the input state of the effect operation device 208 is an input enable state (YES in step S1600-1), and the effect button 208a performs an input operation (YES in step S1600-1). It is determined that the effect button 208a has been input-operated by executing the operation detection process for determining whether or not the pressing operation has been performed (YES in step S1600-7), and it is determined that the customer is not waiting (NO in step S1600-9). ), The effect operation control process at the time of input is executed (step S1610).

Further, in the input operation control process (FIG. 54), the sub CPU 330a determines that the setting confirmation status flag is on and the gaming machine status is the setting confirmation status (YES in step S1610-1), and the administrator. The menu display process is executed (step S1610-3). In the administrator menu display process, the sub CPU 330a uses the administrator menu timer to measure the duration of the input operation of the effect button 208a, and when it is determined that the input operation of the effect button 208a is continued for a predetermined time, Create an administrator menu display command and set it in the send buffer. When the image control unit 340 receives the administrator menu display command, the image control unit 340 controls to display the image corresponding to the administrator menu screen on the effect display unit 200a. As a result, an administrator menu capable of setting the time of the game machine, viewing the change history of the set value, and the like is displayed on the effect display unit 200a.

Returning to FIG. 59, for example, at the time of setting confirmation state notification effect, the image control unit 340 sets the background color of the effect display unit 200a to black (dark color) and white as in the setting change state notification effect (see FIG. 56). Display the setting confirmation notification image and menu display message image with. Further, when the voice control unit 350 receives the setting-related notification command, it outputs a warning sound (for example, a buzzer sound) notifying that the setting confirmation state has occurred. Further, when the lighting control unit 360 receives the setting-related notification command, the lighting control unit 204 lights the effect lighting device 204 and the frame lighting device (not shown) in a predetermined emission color (for example, red). When a lighting device (button lighting device) (not shown) is provided on the upper surface of the effect button 208a, the lighting control unit 360 lights the button lighting device with a predetermined emission color (for example, green). You may. The lighting control unit 360 may turn off the effect lighting device 204 and turn on only the button lighting device and the frame lighting device at the time of setting confirmation state notification effect. In this way, the game machine 100 can clearly notify that the setting confirmation process is being executed by executing the setting confirmation state notification effect in the setting confirmation state.

Returning to FIG. 58, the setting confirmation state ends and the gaming machine state transitions to the game-enabled state at the time t1 after the lapse of a predetermined time from the time t0 in the setting confirmation state. Hereinafter, the flow of control related to the determination of the input state and the operation mode at time t1 will be described.

Specifically, at time t1 shown in FIG. 58, an employee of the game store performs a return operation of the setting key, and the setting confirmation process is completed. Therefore, in the set value-related processing at time t1 (see FIG. 24), the main CPU 300a has detected a return operation of the setting key (switching of the input signal from the setting key switch 180s from the on state to the off state). Based on, the setting-related end specification command indicating that the setting confirmation state is terminated is set in the transmission buffer, and the value indicating the game-enabled state is set in the game machine status flag (NO in step S410-17 → step S410-). 19 → Flow of steps S410-27). In this way, based on the fact that the main CPU 300a (an example of the setting changing means) detects the return operation of the setting key, the setting confirmation state in which the setting confirmation process can be executed ends. Along with this, the game machine state shifts to the game-enabled state.

The setting-related end specification command set in the transmission buffer at the time t1 shown in FIG. 58 is the time that is the end timing of the game machine state transition period, similarly to the times t1 to t2 (see FIG. 55) at the end of the setting change. It is received by the sub-control board 330 at t2. As a result, at the time t2 shown in FIG. 58, it is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 that the game machine state has shifted to the game-enabled state. In the second stage of FIG. 58, as in FIG. 55, the game machine state transition period is indicated by diagonal lines.

Even at the time t1 after a predetermined time from the time t0 shown in FIG. 58, the game machine state is not the setting change state (NO in step S1500-1), and no error has occurred (NO in step S1500-3). ), The variation effect is not executed (NO in step S1500-5). That is, all three input restriction conditions are not satisfied, and the first input permission flag is set to the ON state (step S1500-9). Therefore, at the time t1 shown in FIG. 58, the input state of the effect operating device 208 is maintained in the input enable state, and the operation mode of the effect device is maintained in the normal mode in the normal permission pattern.

Further, at the time t2 when the game machine state transition period ends, all three input restriction conditions are not satisfied, and the first input permission flag is set to the ON state (step S1500-9). .. Therefore, at the time t1 shown in FIG. 58, the input state of the effect operating device 208 is maintained in the input enable state, and the operation mode of the effect device is maintained in the normal mode in the normal permission pattern. As shown in FIG. 58, when the game machine state is not the setting change state when the power is turned on, the effect operation device also includes the period from time t0 to the time t2 at which the game machine state transition period ends, and the period after time t2. The input state of 208 is not set to the special input restricted state. Therefore, the operation mode of the effect device does not become a special mode. Since the transition mode of the input state of the effect operating device 208 and the operation mode of the effect device after the time t2 shown in FIG. 58 is the same as the transition mode after the time t2 shown in FIG. 55, the description thereof will be omitted.

In this way, the input state of the effect operation device 208 becomes an input enable state based on the execution of the setting confirmation process, and the predetermined timing after the end of the setting confirmation process (in this example, the end of the game state transition period at time t2). Even in (timing), it is maintained in a normal state (input enable state or normal input restricted state) other than the special input restricted state, and unless the setting change process accompanying the power off and power on is executed after the end of the setting confirmation process, that is, the game As long as the machine state is maintained in the playable state, it does not shift from the normal state to the special input restricted state.

In addition, the operation mode of the effect device becomes the normal mode in the normal permission pattern based on the execution of the setting confirmation process, and is maintained in the normal mode (normal permission pattern or normal regulation pattern) even after the setting confirmation process is completed, and the setting confirmation. The mode does not shift from the normal mode to the special mode unless the setting change process accompanying the power off and power on is executed after the end of the process. That is, the game machine 100 does not change the operation mode of the effect device to the special mode when the setting change process (setting value change operation) is not executed, so that the input operation (effect button 208a in this example) of the effect device (in this example) is performed. It is possible to accept the pressing operation), display various menu screens, and execute an effect operation based on an input operation in the operation effect.

As a result, the game machine 100 can provide the player with a viewing and setting service (custom for the actual machine) of information about the game machine being played, and can improve the game performance during the variable production, and eventually the game. It is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, the game machine 100 can provide information browsing and setting functions (administrator menu) to the employees of the game store, and can improve the convenience of managing the game machine.

As described above, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the effect device (effect display device 200, effect accessory device 202, effect lighting device 204, and sound output device 206) is in a state in which the setting change process is executed. The operation is controlled based on the operation mode including the special mode that regulates the operation based on the input operation of the effect operation device 208 and the normal mode that allows the operation based on the input operation when the setting change process is not executed. Will be done. Further, based on the execution of the setting change process, the operation mode becomes a special mode, the operation mode becomes the normal mode at a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process, and the setting change process is not executed again after the end of the setting change process. As long as the operation mode does not shift from the normal mode to the special mode. As a result, the game machine 100 can improve the input accuracy of the set value in a state where the set value can be changed. Further, the game machine 100 shifts from the special mode to the normal mode at a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process, thereby improving the input accuracy of the set value and providing serviceability and game performance by the input operation of the effect operation device 208. It is possible to achieve both improvement and improvement.

(Control of adjustment button adjustment status and adjustment mode)
Next, the adjustment state control process (step S1700) in the subtimer interrupt process (see FIG. 44) will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the adjustment state control process. In the adjustment state control process, the game machine state and the sub control board 330 in which the main control board 300 determines the adjustment state indicating whether or not the adjustment operation of each configuration of the adjustment button 209 (volume control button 209a, light amount adjustment button 209b) can be accepted. It is a process of controlling based on the state of execution control of the effect in.

(Step S1700-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the current game machine state is the setting change state in the same manner as in step S1500-1 of the input state control process (see FIG. 52). When the sub CPU 330a determines that the setting change state flag is on and the game machine state is the setting change state, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1700-9. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the setting change state flag is off and the game state is not the setting change state, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1700-3.

(Step S1700-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not an error has occurred in the game machine 100 in the same manner as in step S1500-3 of the input state control process. When the sub CPU 330a determines that an error is occurring, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1700-9. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 330a determines that no error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1700-5.

(Step S1700-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the jackpot effect associated with the big role game is being executed. For example, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the jackpot effect start flag is on and the control related to the jackpot effect has been started, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1700-9. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the jackpot effect start flag is off and the control related to the jackpot effect has not been started, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1700-7.

(Step S1700-7)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the power saving mode is in progress. For example, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the power saving mode flag is on and is in the power saving mode, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1700-9. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the power saving mode flag is off and is not in the power saving mode, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1700-11.

(Step S1700-9)
The sub CPU 330a sets the second input permission flag to the off state and ends the adjustment state control process. The second input permission flag is a state in which the adjustment state of each configuration of the adjustment button 209 (volume adjustment button 209a, light amount adjustment button 209b) is permitted (allowed) by a player or the like when the adjustment state is on. It indicates that it is in the (adjustable state), and when it is in the off state, it indicates that the adjustment state is a state in which acceptance of the adjustment operation by the player or the like is restricted (adjustment regulation state). The second input permission flag is stored in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 330c. In this example, the adjustment regulation state indicates, in principle, the state in which the reception of the adjustment operation is stopped. By setting the second input permission flag to the off state in this step, each of the volume control button 209a and the light amount control button 209b is subsequently set to the control control state.

(Step S1700-11)
The sub CPU 330a sets the second input permission flag to the ON state and ends the adjustment state control process. As a result, thereafter, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 (volume adjustment button 209a, light amount adjustment button 209b) is set to the adjustable state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the game machine state is the setting change state (YES in step S1700-1), the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is the adjustment regulation state, and the acceptance of the adjustment operation is restricted (in this example). It will be stopped). Further, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the adjustment button 209 is also adjusted when the game machine state is other than the setting change state (YES in step S1700-3, YES in step S1700-5 or YES in step S1700-7). The state becomes the adjustment regulation state.

Specifically, in the above-mentioned adjustment state control process (see FIG. 60), the adjustment button 209 is adjusted so that the player or the like is restricted from accepting the adjustment operation when a predetermined condition (adjustment regulation condition) is satisfied. It is set to the regulated state, and when the above-mentioned adjustment regulation condition is not satisfied, it is set to the adjustable state in which the player or the like is allowed to accept the adjustment operation. Further, this adjustment state control process is executed for each subtimer interrupt process. Therefore, when the adjustment regulation condition is not satisfied (released), the input state of the adjustment button 209 is promptly shifted to the adjustable state. Similarly, when the adjustment regulation condition is satisfied, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is promptly shifted to the adjustment regulation state.

As shown in FIG. 60, the adjustment regulation conditions include that the game machine state is in the setting change state (first adjustment regulation condition), that an error is occurring (second adjustment regulation condition), and that a jackpot is being produced. (Third adjustment regulation condition) or power saving mode (fourth adjustment regulation condition) is included, and at least one of these four conditions is satisfied (steps S1700-1 to S1700-7). When either of them becomes YES), the adjustment button 209 is in the adjustment regulation state (step S1700-9). That is, in the present embodiment, a plurality of adjustment regulation conditions (in this example, the first adjustment regulation condition, the second adjustment regulation condition, the third adjustment regulation condition, and the fourth adjustment regulation condition) are set in the game machine 100. The sub CPU 330a sets the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 to the adjustment regulation state based on the fact that at least one of the plurality of adjustment regulation conditions is satisfied. In the present invention, the adjustment regulation conditions are not limited to the above four. The adjustment regulation condition may include the setting change state (first adjustment regulation condition), and the adjustment regulation condition may be four or more or less than four. For example, the regulation regulation condition may include one or two of the second regulation regulation condition to the fourth regulation regulation condition in addition to the first regulation regulation condition.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first adjustment regulation condition and the second adjustment regulation condition have the same contents as the first condition and the second condition among the three input regulation conditions related to the input state of the above-mentioned effect operation device 208. It has become. Therefore, in the game machine 100, the effect operation device 208 and the adjustment button 209 are operated (input operation, adjustment) based on the same event (the game machine state is the game change state or an error is occurring). It may be in a regulated state (input restricted state, adjustment regulated state) that does not accept operation).

Here, among the above-mentioned four adjustment regulation conditions, the adjustment regulation state when the above-mentioned first adjustment regulation condition is satisfied, that is, when the game machine 100 is executing the setting change process (setting change state). Is called a special adjustment regulation state. On the other hand, the above-mentioned first adjustment regulation condition is not satisfied, and the above-mentioned second adjustment regulation condition (error is occurring), third adjustment regulation condition (big hit is being produced), or fourth condition. The adjustment regulation state of the adjustment button 209 when (being in the power saving mode) is established is called a normal adjustment regulation state.

Since the special adjustment regulation state is an adjustment state set in association with the above-mentioned setting change process using the setting key, it is set at the time of power recovery or ram clear on the main control board 300. That is, the special adjustment regulation state is not set during a normal game or during a game standby (when the game machine state is a game-enabled state).

Further, in the normal adjustment restricted state that can be set during the error occurrence, the jackpot effect, or the power saving mode, a state in which the acceptance of the adjustment operation of the adjustment button 209 is limitedly permitted (limited adjustment permitted state) may occur. The limited adjustment permission state indicates a state in which the adjustment operation of the adjustment button 209 can be accepted in a state in which the adjustment button 209 is limited in time or function during the normal adjustment regulation state. In this example, for example, a limited adjustment permission state occurs during a specific period during the execution of the jackpot effect. On the other hand, the limited adjustment permission state does not occur in the special adjustment regulation state. That is, in the special adjustment regulation state, the reception of the adjustment operation is always restricted.

Further, when none of the above four adjustment regulation conditions is satisfied in the present embodiment (NO in steps S1700-1 to 7), the adjustment is made based on the setting of the second input permission flag to the ON state. The adjusted state of the button 209 becomes the adjustable state (step S1700-11). Since the adjustment operation to the adjustment button 209 is accepted in the adjustable state, the sub CPU 330a can control the adjustment operation of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 according to the adjustment operation of the adjustment button 209. In the game machine 100, the period during which the adjustable state and the limited adjustment permitted state correspond to the operation valid period of the adjustment button 209.

In the present embodiment, adjustment states (adjustable state or normal adjustment regulation state) other than the special adjustment regulation state that can be set other than the setting change state (setting change processing is being executed) are collectively referred to as "normal adjustment state". ".

In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 330a performs detection control of the adjustment operation on the adjustment button 209 according to the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 set in the adjustment state control process. As a result, in the game machine 100, input control of control setting values (volume control value, brightness control value in this example) based on the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is performed.

Next, the adjustment button detection control process (step S1800) in the subtimer interrupt process (see FIG. 44) will be described as an example of the adjustment detection control process of the adjustment button 209 based on the adjustment state. FIG. 61 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the adjustment button detection control process. The adjustment button detection control process is a detection control process of an adjustment operation for the volume control button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b constituting the adjustment button 209.

(Step S1800-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is an adjustable state. When the sub CPU 330a determines that the second input permission flag is on and the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is in the adjustable state, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1800-7. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the second input permission flag is off and the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is the adjustment regulation state, the process proceeds to step S1800-3.

(Step S1800-3)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is a special adjustment regulation state among the adjustment regulation states. When the sub CPU 330a determines that the second input permission flag is off and the setting change status flag is on and is in the special adjustment regulation state, the adjustment button detection control is performed without executing the processes of steps S1800-5 and subsequent steps. The process ends and the process returns to the subtimer interrupt process (see FIG. 44). On the other hand, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the second input permission flag is in the off state and the setting change state flag is in the off state and is in the normal adjustment regulation state, the process shifts to step S1800-5.

(Step S1800-5)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the adjustment state is the limited adjustment permission state. Specifically, the sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the current period is a specific period during the execution of the jackpot effect. When the specific period start flag is on and the current time is within the specific period, the sub CPU 330a determines that the limited permission adjustment state is in effect, and shifts the process to step S1800-7. On the other hand, the sub CPU 330a determines that the limited permission adjustment state is not performed when the specific period start flag is off and is not within the specific period, and ends the adjustment button detection control process without executing the processes after step S1800-7. Then, it returns to the subtimer interrupt processing. As described above, the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment is in the limited adjustment permission state in which the adjustment operation is permitted in a limited manner even if the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is the adjustment regulation state within a specific period during the jackpot production. It becomes.

In this example, the specific period in which the limited adjustment permission state occurs in the normal adjustment regulation state is set as the predetermined period during the execution of the jackpot effect, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the specific period may be provided during the error notification effect during the occurrence of an error, or may be provided during the power saving mode. Further, for example, whether or not a specific period during an error is provided during the error notification effect may differ depending on the type of error.

(Step S1800-7)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the adjustment button 209 has been adjusted (pressed in this example). Specifically, the sub CPU 330a determines that the adjustment button 209 has been adjusted when the detection signal is input from the volume button operation detection switch 209s1 or the light amount button operation detection switch 209s2, and performs processing in step S1800-9. Transfer.

On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input from either the volume button operation detection switch 209s1 or the light amount button operation detection switch 209s2, the sub CPU 330a determines that the adjustment button 209 has not been adjusted and controls the adjustment button detection. The process ends, and the process returns to the subtimer interrupt process without executing the processes after step S1800-9. As described above, in the present embodiment, the adjustment button 209 (in this example, the volume adjustment button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b) is relative to the adjustment button 209 based on the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 being the adjustable state or the limited adjustment permission state. Adjustment operation detection is performed. That is, the process of this step S1800-7 corresponds to the operation detection process of the adjustment button 209.

(Step S1800-9)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the demonstration is being produced. When the sub CPU 330a determines that the customer waiting flag is on and the demo effect is currently being produced, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1800-11. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the customer waiting flag is off and the demo effect is not currently being produced, the sub CPU 330a shifts the process to step S1810 without executing step S1800-11. As described above, in the present embodiment, since the adjustment is normally restricted during the power saving mode, the process of this step S1800-9 is not executed. Therefore, it is not necessary to determine whether or not the power saving mode is in use in this step.

(Step S1800-11)
The sub CPU 330a executes the demo effect end process. Since the demo effect end process executed here is the same process as in steps S1221-7 and S1221-9 of the customer waiting end process (FIG. 47), the description thereof will be omitted.

(Step S1810)
The sub CPU 330a executes an adjustment operation control process for controlling the adjustment operations (volume adjustment operation, brightness adjustment operation) of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 based on the adjustment operation (pressing operation) of the adjustment button 209. The adjustment button detection control process is terminated, and the process returns to the subtimer interrupt process (FIG. 44). As will be described in detail later, in the adjustment operation control process, the sub CPU 330a controls the adjustment operation of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 based on the detection signal whose input is detected in step S1800-7.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 330a adjusts the volume adjustment button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b constituting the adjustment button 209 based on the adjustment state set in the above-mentioned adjustment state control process (see FIG. 60). Controls whether or not an operation is detected. Further, in the above-mentioned adjustment button detection control process, the sub CPU 330a controls the operation of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 according to the adjustment mode related to the possibility of the adjustment operation corresponding to the detection of the adjustment operation. Here, the adjustment mode related to the volume output from the audio output device 206 is set to the volume adjusting mode, and the adjusting mode related to the brightness of the effect display unit 200a in the effect display device 200 is set to the brightness adjustment mode. Further, the term "adjustment mode" is a general term for the volume control mode and the brightness control mode.

In the volume control mode of the voice output device 206, the volume control operation (volume control value) based on the volume control operation of the volume control button 209a in the state where the control state is the special control regulation state, that is, the setting change process is being executed. Allows volume adjustment operation based on the volume adjustment operation in the special adjustment mode that regulates the volume adjustment operation of the sound output based on the above, and in the state that is not in the special adjustment regulation state, that is, the setting change process is not executed. Includes possible normal adjustment modes.

That is, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the voice output device 206 has a special adjustment mode in which the volume adjustment operation based on the volume adjustment operation of the volume adjustment button 209a is restricted, and the setting change process is not executed. The volume control operation is controlled based on the volume control mode including the normal mode in which the volume control operation based on the volume control operation is allowed. Further, the audio output device 206 stays in the special adjustment mode among the plurality of volume adjustment modes when the setting change process is being executed.

Similarly, in the brightness adjustment mode of the effect display device 200, the brightness adjustment operation based on the adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment button 209b is performed in the state where the adjustment state is the special adjustment regulation state, that is, the setting change process is being executed. A special adjustment mode that regulates (the operation of adjusting the brightness (brightness of the backlight) of the effect display unit 200a based on the brightness control value) and a state that is not in the special adjustment regulation state, that is, a state in which the setting change process is not executed. In the normal adjustment mode, which allows the brightness adjustment operation based on the brightness adjustment operation.

That is, in the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the effect display device 200 has a special adjustment mode in which the brightness adjustment operation based on the brightness adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment button 209b is regulated, and a setting change process when the special adjustment regulation state is not obtained. The brightness adjustment operation is controlled based on the brightness adjustment mode including the normal mode in which the brightness adjustment operation based on the brightness adjustment operation is allowed when is not executed. Further, the effect display device 200 stays in the special adjustment mode among the plurality of brightness adjustment modes when the setting change process is being executed.

Specifically, when the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 (volume adjustment button 209a, light amount adjustment button 209b) of the sub CPU 330a is a special adjustment regulation state (NO in step S1800-1 → YES in step S1800-3). , The detection process (step S1800-7) of the adjustment operation (pressing operation) of the volume adjustment button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b is not executed, and the sound output device 206 and the effect display device 200 based on the adjustment operation are operated at the time of adjustment. The control process (step S1810) is also not performed. This series of controls corresponds to the adjustment operation control of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 by the special adjustment mode. That is, in the present embodiment, the special adjustment mode is an adjustment mode based on the special adjustment regulation state. The audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 are based on the adjustment operation (for example, pressing operation) of the adjustment button 209 (volume adjustment button 209a, light amount adjustment button 209b) by controlling the adjustment operation based on the special adjustment mode. Adjustment movement is regulated.

Further, when the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is not the special adjustment regulation state (YES in step S1800-1 or NO in step S1800-3), the sub CPU 330a adjusts the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 in the normal adjustment mode. Operate operation control. Here, the adjustment operation control of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device in the normal adjustment mode includes a normal adjustment permission pattern and a normal adjustment regulation pattern. When the adjustment state of the sub CPU330a is adjustable (YES in step S1800-1), or when the adjustment state is in the limited adjustment permission state (NO in step S1800-1 → NO in step S1800-3 → step S1800). In (YES) of -5, the detection process (step S1800-7) of the adjustment operation (pressing operation) of the adjustment button 209 is executed, and the adjustment operation (volume adjustment operation, brightness adjustment operation) of the volume adjustment button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b is executed. ) Is performed, the operation control at the time of adjustment of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 based on the adjustment operation is performed (flow from YES in step S1800-7 to step S1810). This series of controls corresponds to the adjustment operation control of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 in the normal adjustment mode of the normal adjustment permission pattern.

That is, in the present embodiment, the normal adjustment mode of the normal adjustment permission pattern is an adjustment mode based on the adjustable state or the limited adjustment permission state in the normal adjustment regulation state. By controlling the voice output device 206 in the normal adjustment mode of the normal adjustment permission pattern among the volume control modes, for example, a volume control operation based on the volume control operation (pressing operation) of the volume control button 209a is permitted. Similarly, the effect display device 200 is controlled in the normal mode of the normal adjustment permission pattern among the brightness adjustment modes, so that the brightness adjustment operation based on, for example, the brightness adjustment operation (pressing operation) of the light amount adjustment button 209b is permitted. Will be done.

Further, when the adjustment state is not the normal adjustment regulation state and the limited adjustment permission state (NO in step S1800-1 → NO in step S1800-3 → NO in step S1800-5), the sub CPU 330a is similarly in the special adjustment mode. The detection process (step S1800-7) of the adjustment operation (pressing operation) of the adjustment button 209 is not executed, and the adjustment operation control process (step S1810) of the voice output device 206 and the effect display device 200 based on the adjustment operation is also performed. Not performed. This series of controls corresponds to the adjustment operation control of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 in the normal adjustment mode of the normal adjustment regulation pattern.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the type of adjustment mode (special adjustment mode or normal adjustment mode) based on the flow of detection control of the adjustment button 209 differs depending on whether or not the game machine state is the setting change state. In the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, among the types of adjustment modes (volume adjustment mode, brightness adjustment mode) of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200, the normal adjustment mode includes a normal adjustment permission pattern and a normal adjustment regulation pattern. The two patterns can be reversibly migrated.

That is, in the voice output device 206, in the normal adjustment mode in the volume control mode, the volume control operation based on the volume control operation is performed from the normal control permission pattern in which the volume control operation based on the volume control operation of the volume control button 209a is permitted. There may be a shift to a regulated normal regulation regulation pattern. On the contrary, the audio output device 206 may shift from the normal adjustment regulation pattern to the normal adjustment permission pattern during the normal adjustment mode in the volume control mode.

Similarly, in the normal adjustment mode in the brightness adjustment mode, the effect display device 200 is based on the brightness adjustment operation from the normal adjustment permission pattern in which the brightness adjustment operation based on the brightness adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment button 209b is permitted. There may be a shift to a normal adjustment regulation pattern in which the brightness adjustment operation is regulated. On the contrary, the effect display device 200 may shift from the normal adjustment regulation pattern to the normal adjustment permission pattern during the normal adjustment mode in the luminance adjustment mode.

On the other hand, in the game machine 100, the adjustment mode does not reversibly shift between the normal adjustment mode and the special adjustment mode. Specifically, in the game machine 100, the voice output device 206 sets the volume adjustment mode to the special adjustment mode based on the execution of the setting change process. Further, at a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process (for example, when the first adjustment state control process (see FIG. 60) is executed after the end of the setting change process), the volume adjustment mode becomes the normal adjustment mode. That is, at a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process, the volume adjustment mode shifts from the special adjustment mode to the normal adjustment mode. Further, the volume control mode does not shift from the normal control mode to the special control mode unless the setting change process is executed again after the setting change process is completed.

Similarly, in the game machine 100, the effect display device 200 sets the brightness adjustment mode to the special adjustment mode based on the execution of the setting change process. Further, at a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process (for example, when the first adjustment state control process is executed after the end of the setting change process), the brightness adjustment mode becomes the normal adjustment mode. That is, at a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process, the luminance adjustment mode shifts from the special adjustment mode to the normal adjustment mode. Further, the brightness adjustment mode does not shift from the normal adjustment mode to the special adjustment mode unless the setting change processing is executed again after the setting change processing is completed.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the operation mode of the effect device (effect display device 200, effect accessory device 202, effect lighting device 204, and sound output device 206) is a power saving mode that reduces the power consumption of the effect device. Is included.
In the power saving mode, the voice output device 206 is set to, for example, a mute state in which no voice is output, and the power consumption is reduced (an example of the power saving state). As described above, the game machine 100 does not shift to the power saving mode during the execution of the setting change process. Therefore, the audio output device 206 does not shift to the power saving state associated with the power saving mode during the execution of the setting change process. The volume adjustment mode of the audio output device 206 is the normal adjustment mode of the normal adjustment regulation pattern during the power saving mode (while the fourth condition of the adjustment regulation condition is satisfied).

Similarly, in the power saving mode, the effect display device 200 is in a state in which power consumption is reduced (an example of a power saving state) by suppressing the brightness of the effect display unit 200a, for example. During the power saving mode, for example, the brightness of the effect display unit 200a (brightness of the backlight) may be reduced to the minimum. Since the game machine 100 does not shift to the power saving mode during the execution of the setting change process, the effect display device 200 does not shift to the power saving state associated with the power saving mode during the execution of the setting change process. The brightness adjustment mode of the effect display device 200 is the normal adjustment mode of the normal adjustment regulation pattern during the power saving mode (while the fourth condition of the adjustment regulation condition is satisfied).

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the special adjustment mode and the normal adjustment mode in the normal adjustment regulation pattern, the adjustment operations (volume adjustment operation, brightness adjustment operation) of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 based on the adjustment operation of the adjustment button 209. ) Indicates that the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 are not allowed to perform the adjustment operation corresponding to the adjustment operation of the adjustment button 209. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the game machine 100 limits the adjustment operation corresponding to the adjustment operation of the adjustment button 209 as the regulation of the adjustment operation of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 based on the adjustment operation in the normal adjustment mode in the normal adjustment regulation pattern. You may. In this case, the game machine 100 limits the volume control values that can be set, for example, when the volume control operation based on the volume control operation in the voice output device 206 is restricted (for example, the volume control values "5", "6", and "7". Only the range of can be set, etc.). Similarly, when the effect display device 200 regulates the brightness adjustment operation based on the brightness adjustment operation, the game machine 100 limits the brightness control values that can be set (for example, the brightness control values "5", "6", and "7". Only the range of "" can be set, etc.).

Next, the adjustment operation control process (step S1810) for controlling the adjustment operation of the voice output device 206 and the effect display device 200 based on the adjustment operation of the adjustment button 209 will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the operation control process during adjustment. In the present embodiment, the adjustment operation control process is the adjustment operation (volume adjustment mode) of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 based on the normal adjustment mode of the normal adjustment permission pattern among the adjustment modes (volume adjustment mode, brightness adjustment mode). This is a process for controlling (adjustment operation, brightness adjustment operation). Therefore, the adjustment time operation control process is executed when the adjustment state of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 is the adjustable state or the limited adjustment permission state.

(Step S1810-1)
The sub CPU 330a determines whether or not the volume control button 209a is pressed (adjustment operation). Specifically, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the detection signal detected in step S1800-7 of the adjustment button detection control process (see FIG. 61) is the detection signal input from the volume button operation detection switch 209s1, the volume is increased. It is determined that the volume adjustment operation has been executed by the adjustment button 209a, and the process is moved to step S1810-3. On the other hand, if the sub CPU 330a determines that the detection signal detected in step S1800-7 is a detection signal input from the light amount button operation detection switch 209s2 instead of the volume button operation detection switch 209s1, the sub CPU 330a processes in step S1810-5. Transfer.

(Step S1810-3)
The sub CPU 330a executes the volume adjustment process based on the fact that the volume control button 209a is pressed (adjustment operation). The volume control process is a process of adjusting the volume by causing the voice output device 206 to perform a volume control operation. In the volume control process, the sub CPU 330a creates a volume control command and sets it in the transmission buffer. The volume control command includes volume increase / decrease information based on the mode (how it was operated) of the volume control operation of the volume control button 209a. In the present embodiment, the volume control button 209a is provided with an upper region and a lower region as operation regions that can be pressed. When the sub CPU 330a analyzes the detection signal input from the volume button operation detection switch 209s1 and determines that the upper region of the volume control button 209a has been pressed, the volume control value is set to a value one step larger than the current volume control value ( For example, a volume control command including volume increase / decrease information indicating that the setting is made from "4" to "5") is created. Further, when the sub CPU 330a analyzes the detection signal and determines that the lower region of the volume control button 209a has been pressed, the volume control value is set to a value one step smaller than the current volume control value (for example, "7" → "6". ”) To create a volume control command that includes volume increase / decrease information indicating that it is set to.

The volume control command is transmitted to the voice control unit 350 in the output control process of step S1100-7. The voice control unit 350 sets a volume control value indicating the volume of the voice output device 206 based on the volume increase / decrease information included in the volume control command. As a result, in the voice output device 206, the volume adjustment operation of adjusting the volume based on the volume control value corresponding to the adjustment operation of the volume adjustment button 209a is executed. For example, when the volume control value currently being set is the maximum value (for example, "7"), a volume control command including volume increase / decrease information that sets the volume control value to a value one step larger than the current volume control value is issued. Upon reception, the voice control unit 350 may maintain the volume control value at the maximum value. On the contrary, when the volume control value currently being set is the minimum value (for example, "1"), a volume control command including volume increase / decrease information that sets the volume control value to a value one step smaller than the current volume control value. Is received, the voice control unit 350 may maintain the volume control value at the minimum value.

Further, based on the volume control operation of the volume control button 209a, a bar-shaped volume display image (volume bar image) indicating the current volume control value may be displayed on the effect display unit 200a. For example, the volume bar image may be displayed in a number indicating the current volume control value based on the volume control operation of the volume control button 209a. In this case, for example, if the current volume control value is "3", three volume bar images are displayed. Further, the volume bar image may show the current volume control value depending on the display mode (for example, display color). In this case, during the volume adjustment operation, for example, the same number of volume bar images (7 in this example) as the maximum number of volume control values are displayed side by side on the effect display unit 200a, and the 7 volume bar images Of these, the volume control value may be indicated by the number displayed in a display color (for example, "red") different from the default display color (for example, white). More specifically, the seven volume bar images show, for example, the volume control values "1" to "7" in ascending order from left to right, and when the current volume control value is "2", 7 Of the volume bar images of a book, two from the left end may be displayed in red, and the remaining five may be displayed in white (default display color).

When displaying the volume display image on the effect display unit 200a during the volume control operation, the volume control command created by the sub CPU 330a may be transmitted to the image control unit 340 as well. Further, in this case, the volume control command may include a volume control value newly set as volume increase / decrease information. As a result, the image control unit 340 produces a volume display image (for example, a volume bar image) corresponding to the newly set volume control value based on the volume adjustment process (step S1810-3) accompanying the volume adjustment operation. It can be displayed on the display unit 200a.

(Step S1810-5)
The sub CPU 330a executes the brightness adjustment process based on the fact that the light amount adjustment button 209b is pressed (adjustment operation). The brightness adjustment process is a process of causing the effect display device 200 to perform a brightness adjustment operation to adjust the brightness of the effect display unit 200a. In the luminance adjustment process, the sub CPU 330a creates a luminance adjustment command in the luminance adjustment process and sets it in the transmission buffer. The brightness adjustment command includes brightness increase / decrease information based on the mode (how the operation was performed) of the brightness adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment button 209b. In the present embodiment, the light amount adjusting button 209b is provided with an upper region and a lower region as operation regions that can be pressed, similarly to the volume adjusting button 209a. When the sub CPU 330a analyzes the detection signal input from the light intensity button operation detection switch 209s2 and determines that the upper region of the light intensity adjustment button 209b has been pressed, the luminance control value is set to a value one step larger than the current luminance control value ( For example, a brightness adjustment command including brightness increase / decrease information indicating that the setting is made from “4” to “5”) is created. Further, when the sub CPU 330a analyzes the detection signal and determines that the lower region of the light amount adjustment button 209b has been pressed, the brightness control value is set to a value one step smaller than the current brightness control value (for example, "7" → "6". ”) To create a brightness adjustment command that includes brightness increase / decrease information indicating that the setting is to be made.

The brightness adjustment command is transmitted to the image control unit 340 in the output control process of step S1100-7. The image control unit 340 analyzes the brightness adjustment command and outputs a control signal based on the brightness increase / decrease information to the control unit of the backlight unit (not shown) of the effect display device 200. As a result, the brightness of the backlight of the effect display device 200 is adjusted based on the control signal, and in the effect display device 200, the effect display unit 200a is based on the brightness control value corresponding to the brightness adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment button 209b. The brightness adjustment operation for adjusting the brightness of is executed. For example, when the brightness control value currently being set is the maximum value (for example, "7"), a brightness adjustment command including brightness increase / decrease information that sets the brightness control value to a value one step larger than the current brightness control value is issued. Upon reception, the image control unit 340 may transmit a control signal to maintain the luminance control value to the control unit of the backlight unit. Further, when the brightness control value currently being set is the minimum value (for example, "1"), a brightness adjustment command including brightness increase / decrease information for setting the brightness control value to a value one step smaller than the current brightness control value is received. Similarly, in this case, the image control unit 340 may transmit a control signal for maintaining the luminance control value to the control unit of the backlight unit.

Further, based on the brightness adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment button 209b, a rod-shaped brightness control image (light amount bar image) showing the current brightness control value may be displayed on the effect display unit 200a. For example, the light amount bar image may be displayed in a number indicating the current brightness control value based on the brightness adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment button 209b. In this case, for example, if the current luminance control value is "3", three light intensity bar images are displayed. Further, the light intensity bar image may show the current luminance control value depending on the display mode (for example, display color) as in the volume bar image described above. In this case, for example, the seven light intensity bar images showing the numerical range of the configurable brightness control values show the brightness control values "1" to "7" in ascending order from left to right, and the current brightness control. When the value is "2", two of the seven light bar images from the left end are displayed in a color other than the default display color (for example, red), and the remaining five are displayed in the default display color (for example, white). You may.

When displaying the luminance control image on the effect display unit 200a at the time of the luminance adjustment operation, the luminance adjustment command may include the luminance control value newly set as the luminance increase / decrease information. As a result, the image control unit 340 produces a brightness display image (for example, a light intensity bar image) corresponding to the newly set brightness control value based on the brightness adjustment process (step S1810-5) accompanying the brightness adjustment operation. It can be displayed on the display unit 200a.

(Example of adjustment state and transition of adjustment mode)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 and the adjustment mode of the sound output device 206 and the effect display device 200 (volume adjustment mode, brightness adjustment mode) in the present embodiment are used with reference to FIG. 63. An example of the transition of is described.

FIG. 63 is a time chart for explaining the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 and the transition of the adjustment modes (volume adjustment mode, brightness adjustment mode) of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 in chronological order. Specifically, the time axis shown in the first stage of FIG. 63 illustrates the passage of time in the period from time t20 to time 29 after the lapse of a predetermined period from left to right. Further, the second stage of FIG. 63 shows the transition of the game machine state of the game machine 100 in chronological order. Further, the third stage of FIG. 63 shows the transition of the execution status of the variable effect in chronological order, and the fourth stage shows the transition of the execution status of the jackpot effect in chronological order. Further, the fifth stage of FIG. 63 shows the transition of the error occurrence status in the game machine 100 in chronological order, and the sixth stage shows the transition of the power saving mode setting status in the operation mode of the effect device in chronological order. Shown.

That is, in the second stage and the fourth to sixth stages of FIG. 63, the state of establishment of the adjustment regulation condition related to the determination of the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is shown. Further, the seventh stage of FIG. 63 shows the transition of the adjustment state according to the establishment state of the adjustment regulation condition in chronological order. Further, the eighth stage of FIG. 63 shows the transition of the adjustment modes of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 according to the adjustment state in chronological order.

In this example, when the power-on mode is the setting change mode, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 and the transition of the adjustment modes of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 will be described in chronological order.

As shown in the second stage of FIG. 63, when the power is turned on at time t20, the game machine state is in the setting change state, and as shown in the third and fourth stages of FIG. 63, the fluctuation effect and the jackpot effect are executed. Not done (non-execution). Further, at time t20, the occurrence of an error was not detected in the game machine 100 as shown in the fifth stage of FIG. 63 (no error), and the operation mode of the effect device was set as shown in the sixth stage of FIG. Not in power saving mode. That is, at time t20, only the first adjustment regulation condition (being in the setting change state) among the adjustment regulation conditions is satisfied. Therefore, as shown in the 7th stage of FIG. 63, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is set to the special adjustment regulation state at time t20, and accordingly, as shown in the 8th stage of FIG. 63, the audio output device 206. , The adjustment mode of the effect display device 200 is a special adjustment mode.

Hereinafter, the flow of control related to the determination of the adjustment state and the adjustment mode at the time t20 shown in FIG. 63 will be described. For example, at time t20, the employee of the game store powers the game machine 100 in the setting change mode (the state where the inner frame 104 is opened, the setting key is changed, and the RAM clear button 305 (see FIG. 4) is pressed). throw into. As a result, the main CPU 300a transmits a RAM clear designation command including the game machine state type indicating the setting change state to the sub-control board 330, similarly to the time t0 shown in FIG. 55. As a result, the sub CPU 330a executes the sub CPU initialization process (see FIG. 43) at the same time as the time t0 shown in FIG. 55. Therefore, at time t20, the setting change status flag is set to the on state (step S1000-5), the setting-related notification start command indicating the setting change status is set in the transmission buffer (step S1000-11), and the setting change status notification is performed. The effect (see FIG. 56) is executed.

Since the game machine state of the game machine 100 is the setting change state at time t20, no command related to the game is transmitted from the main control board 300. Therefore, in the first sub-timer interrupt process after the time t20, the sub CPU 330a receives the variable command reception process (see FIG. 46) and the jackpot opening designation command in the command analysis process (step S1200), similarly to the time t0 shown in FIG. 55. The process (see FIG. 48) is not executed. As a result, as shown in the third and fourth stages of FIG. 63, the execution control of the fluctuation effect and the jackpot effect is not started at the time t20.

Further, since the main CPU 300a is in the setting change state at the time t20, in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23), an error management process (step S400-21) for determining an error or the like in the same manner as the time t0 shown in FIG. 55. ) Is not executed. Therefore, as shown in the fifth stage of FIG. 63, the occurrence of an error is not detected at time t20, and the error notification (error notification effect) using the effect device is not performed. Further, since the game machine state is the setting change state at the time t20, the main CPU 300a does not execute the special symbol change waiting process (see FIG. 33) as in the time t0 shown in FIG. 55 (step S410 → step S400-). 29 flow). Therefore, as shown in the sixth stage of FIG. 63, at time t20, the customer waiting command is not transmitted and the customer waiting process (FIG. 50) is not executed, so that the power saving mode is not set as the operation mode of the effect device. As described above, at time t20, the fourth adjustment regulation condition is not satisfied from the second adjustment regulation condition among the four adjustment regulation conditions.

Therefore, in the adjustment state control process (see FIG. 60) during the first sub-timer interrupt process after the time t20, the sub CPU 330a determines that the setting is in the change state (YES in step S1700-1), and the second input is permitted. The flag is set to the off state (step S1700-9). As a result, the adjustment button 209 (volume adjustment) is based on the fact that the game machine state is the setting change state (setting change processing is in progress) at time t20, that is, the first adjustment regulation condition among the adjustment regulation conditions is satisfied. The adjustment state of the button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b) is set to the special adjustment regulation state among the adjustment regulation states (see the seventh stage in FIG. 63).

Next, in the adjustment button detection control process (see FIG. 61), the sub CPU 330a determines that the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is the special adjustment regulation state (NO in step S1800-1 → YES in step S1800-3). The adjustment button detection control process is terminated without executing the operation detection process (step S1800-7) of the adjustment button 209. As a result, at time t20, the adjustment mode of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 becomes the special adjustment mode based on the adjustment state being the special adjustment regulation state, that is, the setting change state (FIG. 63). See the 8th row of. That is, the sub CPU 330a performs the adjustment operation (volume adjustment operation, brightness adjustment operation) of the adjustment button 209 (volume adjustment button 209a, light amount adjustment button 209b) at least during the period in which the setting change state (setting change processing is being executed). The adjustment operation control of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 is performed in the special adjustment mode that regulates the corresponding adjustment operation (volume adjustment operation, brightness adjustment operation).

In the adjustment operation control of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 by the special adjustment mode based on the setting change state, the adjustment operation corresponding to the adjustment operation of the adjustment button 209 is regulated. The process for detecting the adjustment operation as in S1800-7) is not executed. As a result, the game machine 100 prevents unnecessary input operations other than the input related to the setting change (for example, inputting the set value by pressing the RAM clear button 305) in a state where the set value can be changed, and makes an input error. Etc. can be reduced. Therefore, the game machine 100 can improve the input accuracy of the set value in a state where the set value can be changed.

Further, as shown in the first stage of FIG. 63, at the time t21 after the lapse of a predetermined time from the time t20, the setting change state ends and the game machine state transitions to the game-enabled state. Specifically, at time t21, an employee of the amusement store performs a return operation of the setting key, and the setting change process is completed. As a result, the set value-related process (see FIG. 24) is executed at the time t21, and the main CPU 300a (an example of the setting changing means) returns the setting key (an example of the specific operation) as in the time t1 shown in FIG. 55. The setting change state (an example of the state in which the setting change process can be executed) ends based on the detection of the above, and the game machine state shifts to the game-enabled state in which the normal game can be executed.

The period from time t21 to time t22 shown in FIG. 63 is the same game machine state transition period as time t1 to time t2 shown in FIG. 55. That is, the setting-related end designation command set in the transmission buffer at time t21 is received by the sub-control board 330 at time t22 after the game machine state transition period. Therefore, as shown in the 7th stage of FIG. 63, the adjustment state is maintained in the special adjustment regulation state at the time t21 as in the time t20, and the adjustment mode is the special adjustment mode as shown in the 8th stage of FIG. Is maintained at. Similar to the period from time t1 to time t2 shown in FIG. 55, the period from time t21 to time t22 is very short (about several milliseconds).

When the setting-related end designation command is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 at the time t22 when the game machine state transition period ends, the sub CPU 330a receives the setting-related end designation command, and the time shown in FIG. 55 is obtained. In the same manner as in t2, execute the setting-related end specification command reception process (see FIG. 49) to set the setting change status flag to the off state (step S1240-3), create a setting-related notification end command, and set it in the transmission buffer. (Step S1240-7). As a result, the setting change state notification effect (see FIG. 56) ends at time t22.

Further, at time t22, since the game is not performed by the player, the control related to the variation effect and the jackpot effect is not executed (see the third and fourth stages of FIG. 63). Further, at time t22, no error has occurred in the game machine 100, and the main CPU 300a has not detected an error in the error management process (step S400-21) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 23) (FIG. See the fifth row of 63). Therefore, at time t22, the error notification (error notification effect) using the effect device is not performed. Further, at time t22, the special symbol change waiting process (see FIG. 33) in the timer interrupt process is not executed, and the customer wait command is not transmitted. Therefore, the sub CPU 330a does not set the operation mode of the effect device to the power saving mode (see the sixth stage in FIG. 63).

As described above, at time t22, none of the four adjustment regulation conditions are satisfied. From this, in the adjustment state control process (see FIG. 60) at time t22, the sub CPU 330a determines that the game state is not the setting change state (NO in step S1700-1), and determines that no error has occurred (step S1700-). 3 NO), it is determined that the control related to the jackpot effect has not been started (NO in step S1700-5), it is determined that the power saving mode is not in progress (NO in step S1700-7), and the second input permission flag is set. Set to the on state. In this way, as shown in the seventh stage of FIG. 63, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is set to the adjustable state at time t22.

Further, in the adjustment button detection control process (see FIG. 61) at time t22, the sub CPU 330a determines that the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is in an inputtable state (YES in step S1800-1), and the adjustment button 209 performs the adjustment operation. An operation detection process for determining whether or not a (pressing operation) has been performed is executed (step S1800-7). As a result, based on the fact that the adjustment state becomes adjustable at time t22, the adjustment modes (volume adjustment mode, brightness adjustment mode) of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 are normally adjusted by the normal adjustment permission pattern. The mode is set (see the 8th stage in FIG. 63). That is, the sub CPU 330a corresponds to the adjustment operation (volume adjustment operation, brightness adjustment operation) of the adjustment button 209 (volume adjustment button 209a, light amount adjustment button 209b) at least during the period in which the game is possible (the setting change processing is not in progress). The adjustment operation control of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 is performed in the normal adjustment mode that allows the adjustment operation (volume adjustment operation, brightness adjustment operation).

In this example, at time t22, neither the volume control button 209a nor the light intensity control button 209b is pressed (adjusted). Therefore, the sub CPU 330a determines in the adjustment button detection control process that the adjustment button 209 has not been adjusted (NO in step S1800-7), and ends the adjustment button detection control process.

As described above, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 (volume adjustment button 209a, light amount adjustment button 209b) becomes a special adjustment regulation state based on the execution of the setting change process at the time t20, and the time t21 At time t22, which is a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process in the above (in this example, the end timing of the game machine state transition period), the special adjustment restricted state is shifted to the adjustable state.

Further, in the game machine 100, the volume adjustment mode of the voice output device 206 becomes a special adjustment mode based on the execution of the setting change processing at the time t20, and the end of the game machine state transition period after the setting change processing at the time t21 is completed. At time t22 (an example of a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process), which is the timing, the mode shifts from the special adjustment mode to the normal adjustment mode in the normal adjustment permission pattern.

Similarly, in the game machine 100, the brightness adjustment mode of the effect display device 200 becomes a special adjustment mode based on the execution of the setting change process at the time t20, and the game machine state transition period after the setting change process at the time t21 is completed. At time t22 (an example of a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process), which is the end timing, the mode shifts from the special adjustment mode to the normal adjustment mode in the normal adjustment permission pattern. That is, the adjustment modes of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 shift according to the transition of the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209.

Further, as described above, the game machine state transition period occurs when the main CPU 300a detects the return operation of the setting key and sends the setting-related end designation command when the setting change state is terminated. That is, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 (volume adjustment button 209a, light amount adjustment button 209b) is specially adjusted unless the setting change key return operation is performed (unless the main CPU 300a detects the setting key return operation). Stay regulated. Similarly, in the adjustment modes (volume adjustment mode, brightness adjustment mode) of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200, the return operation of the setting key is detected by the main CPU 300a unless the return operation of the setting change key is performed. (Unless otherwise) is maintained in special adjustment mode.

Further, at a predetermined timing in the period from time t22 to time t23, the sub CPU 330a receives a customer waiting command from the main control board 300. As a result, the sub CPU 330a resets the customer waiting timer in the customer waiting command reception process (see FIG. 45) (step S1210-1), and sets the customer waiting flag to the on state (step S1210-3). Further, in the customer waiting process (see FIG. 50), the sub CPU 330a determines that the customer is currently waiting and adds 1 to the timer value of the customer waiting timer (YES in step S1300-1 to step S1300-5). Flow), it is determined that the customer waiting expiration time has not elapsed and it is not the start timing of the power saving mode (NO in step S1300-7), the image generation process is executed, and the demonstration effect is started (step S1300-13). As a result, for example, in the effect display unit 200a, a demo effect in which a predetermined demo image is displayed is started.

At the start of the demonstration effect after a predetermined time from the time t22, the game machine state is maintained in the game-enabled state and is not in the setting change state (NO in step S1700-1), and no error has occurred (step). S1700-3 NO), the jackpot effect has not been executed (NO in step S1700-5), and the power saving mode has not been executed (NO in step S1700-7). That is, all four adjustment regulation conditions are not satisfied, and the second input permission flag is set to the ON state (step S1700-11). Therefore, at the start of the demonstration effect, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is maintained in the adjustable state, and the adjustment modes of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 are maintained in the normal adjustment mode in the normal adjustment permission pattern.

At time t23, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the demo production after the time t22, the customer waiting expiration time has been reached because the predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the demo production. Therefore, as shown in the sixth stage of FIG. 63, in the game machine 100, the power saving mode is set as the operation mode at the same time as the time t3 shown in FIG. 55. That is, at the time t23, the effect device is in the power saving mode (see FIG. 57) as in the time t3 shown in FIG. 55, and the operation mode is the normal mode in the normal permission pattern and the power saving mode in parallel. Become.

Further, since the power saving mode is set as the operation mode, the fourth condition of the adjustment regulation condition (being in the power saving mode) is satisfied. Further, at the time t23, as with the time t22, no error has occurred in the game machine 100, and the effect device does not notify the error. Further, at time t23, the jackpot effect is not executed. Therefore, the sub CPU 330a determines that the power saving mode is in progress in the adjustment state control process (FIG. 60) at time t23 (NO in step S1800-1 → NO in step S1800-3 → NO in step S1800-5). → YES in step S1800-7), set the second input permission flag to the off state (step S1800-9). In this way, the second input permission flag is set according to the start of the power saving mode when the game machine state is the game playable state, the error notification is not performed, and the jackpot effect is not executed. Is turned off. Therefore, at time t23, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is set to the normal adjustment regulation state (see the seventh stage in FIG. 63).

Further, in the adjustment button detection control process (FIG. 61) at time t23, the sub CPU 330a determines that the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is the normal adjustment regulation state (NO in step S1800-1 → NO in step S1800-3). ), Since the jackpot effect has not been executed at time t23 and the specific period has not occurred, it is determined that the limited adjustment permission state is not obtained (NO in step S1800-5), and the volume adjustment button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b The adjustment button detection control process is terminated without executing the operation detection process (step 1800-7). As a result, as the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is set to the normal adjustment regulation state, the volume adjustment mode of the audio output device 206 and the brightness adjustment mode of the effect display device 200 are changed from the normal adjustment permission pattern in the normal adjustment mode. It shifts to the normal adjustment regulation pattern (see the eighth stage in FIG. 63).

In this example, the start of the power saving mode (the fourth condition is satisfied) is an example of an opportunity to shift the normal adjustment regulation pattern to the normal adjustment mode. As described above, in the present embodiment, the voice adjustment mode of the voice output device 206 is the volume of the voice output device 206 based on the volume control operation of the volume control button 209a due to the occurrence of a predetermined transition trigger during the normal adjustment mode. There may be a shift to a normal adjustment regulation pattern that can regulate the adjustment operation. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the brightness adjustment mode of the effect display device 200 is the brightness of the effect display device 200 based on the brightness adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment button 209b when a predetermined transition trigger occurs during the normal adjustment mode. There may be a shift to a normal adjustment regulation pattern that can regulate the adjustment operation.

As shown in FIG. 63, it is assumed that the player who visits the game store presses the effect button 208a on the game machine 100 in the power saving mode at the time t24 after the lapse of a predetermined time from the time t23. As a result, the power saving mode in the operation mode of the effect device ends in the same manner as the time t4 shown in FIG. 55 (see the sixth stage in FIG. 63). Therefore, at time t24, all four of the above-mentioned adjustment regulation conditions are not satisfied.

Therefore, at the time t24, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is set to the adjustable state (see the seventh stage in FIG. 63), and the adjustment mode (volume adjustment) of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 is set as in the time t22. The mode (mode, brightness adjustment mode) shifts to the normal adjustment mode according to the normal adjustment permission pattern (see the eighth stage in FIG. 63).

It is assumed that after the time t24, the player starts the game of launching the game ball in the game machine 100, and at the time t25, for example, the game ball enters the first starting port 120. As a result, similarly to the time t5 shown in FIG. 55, a variable effect for notifying the big winning combination lottery result (big hit in this example) is started (see the third stage in FIG. 63). Whether or not the variation effect is executed is not related to the adjustment regulation condition related to the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209. Therefore, at time t25 as well as at time t24, the adjusted state is maintained in the adjustable state (see the seventh stage in FIG. 63), and correspondingly, the adjustment modes of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 are also adjusted. It is maintained in the normal mode according to the normal adjustment permission pattern (see the eighth stage in FIG. 63).

Further, as described above, during the execution of the variation effect, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is the adjustment permission state, and the audio output device 206 is controlled in the normal adjustment mode in the normal adjustment permission pattern. For example, it is assumed that a player performs a volume adjustment operation of pressing the upper area of the volume control button 209a at a predetermined timing during execution of the variation effect after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time t25 at the start of the variation effect.

In this case, in the adjustment button detection control process (see FIG. 61), the sub CPU 330a determines that the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is in an adjustable state (YES in step S1800-1), and the volume adjustment button 209a is pressed. It is determined that the button has been used (step S1800-7), it is determined that the demonstration is not being produced (NO in step S1800-9), and the adjustment operation control process is executed (step S1810). Further, in the adjustment operation control process (see FIG. 62), the sub CPU 330a determines that the upper region of the volume control button 209a has been pressed (YES in step S1810-1), and executes the volume control process (step S1810-). 3). In the volume control process of this example, the volume control value is adjusted to a value one step larger than the value at the time of the volume control operation (for example, the volume control value "4" → "5"). In this way, when the sound output device 206 is controlled in the normal adjustment mode in the normal adjustment permission pattern (for example, during the fluctuation effect), the player can output the sound from the sound output device 206 (for example, during the variation effect). The volume of BGM, production sound, etc.) can be changed to a desired volume.

Further, for example, it is assumed that the player performs a volume adjustment operation of pressing the lower region of the light amount adjustment button 209b at a predetermined timing during the execution of the variation effect after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time t25 at the start of the variation effect. .. In this case, in the adjustment button detection control process, the sub CPU 330a determines that the light amount adjustment button 209b has been pressed (YES in step S1800-1 → the flow of step S1800-7), and executes the adjustment operation control process (step). NO of S1800-9 → Flow of step S1810). Further, in the adjustment operation control process, the sub CPU 330a determines that the lower region of the light amount adjustment button 209b has been pressed (NO in step S1810-1), and executes the brightness adjustment process (step S1810-5). In the brightness adjustment process of this example, the brightness control value is adjusted to a value one step smaller than the value at the time of the brightness adjustment operation (for example, the volume control value “6” → “5”). In this way, the player desires the brightness emitted by the effect display unit 200a of the effect display device 200 when the effect display device 200 is controlled in the normal adjustment mode in the normal adjustment permission pattern (for example, during a variable effect). It can be changed to the brightness of.

When the variable effect is completed by notifying that the big win lottery result is a big hit at the time t26 after the lapse of a predetermined time from the time t25, the big hit effect accompanying the big role game is subsequently started (third stage and 4 in FIG. See the row). Further, at time t26, no error occurred in the game machine 100 (see the fifth stage in FIG. 63), and the power saving mode was not in effect (the sixth stage in FIG. 63). That is, at time t26, the third adjustment regulation condition among the above adjustment regulation conditions is satisfied. As a result, at time t26, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 (volume adjustment button 209a, light amount adjustment button 209b) shifts to the normal adjustment regulation state (see the seventh stage in FIG. 63), and the audio output device 206, The adjustment mode of the effect display device 200 shifts to the normal mode according to the normal adjustment regulation pattern (see the eighth stage of FIG. 63).

Specifically, at time t26, the main CPU 300a sets the special symbol stop designation command in the transmission buffer in step S620-19 based on the end of the fluctuation time of the special symbol (see FIG. 35), and the special symbol is set. The stop display is transmitted to the sub-control board 330. Further, subsequently, the main CPU 300a transmits an opening designation command for transmitting the start of the big role game to the sub-control board 330 in step S630-23 (see FIG. 36) based on the result of the big role lottery being a big hit. Set in the buffer.

When the sub CPU 330a receives the special figure stop designation command, the sub CPU 330a sets the variation effect start flag to the off state. As a result, the control related to the variation effect is completed. When the sub CPU 300a receives the opening designation command, the sub CPU 300a executes the jackpot opening designation command reception process (see FIG. 48). At this time, the sub CPU 300a determines the jackpot effect mode according to the type of jackpot symbol (“special symbol B” in this example) included in the symbol type designation command transmitted at the start of the variation effect (step S1230-). 1), the time data of the time table corresponding to the determined jackpot effect mode is set (step S1230-3), and the jackpot start flag is set to the on state (step S1230-5). As a result, at time t26, the control related to the variation effect ends and the control related to the jackpot effect starts.

Further, in the adjustment state control process at time t26 (see FIG. 60), the sub CPU 300a determines that the jackpot effect is in progress (NO in step S1700-1 → NO in step S1700-3 → step S1700-5). (YES flow), the second input permission flag is set to the off state (step S1700-9). As a result, at time t26, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 shifts to the normal adjustment regulation state (see the seventh stage in FIG. 63). As described above, in this example, the start of the jackpot (the third condition is satisfied) is an example of the opportunity to shift the normal regulation pattern to the normal mode. That is, in the game machine 100, the adjustment mode becomes the normal adjustment mode in the normal adjustment regulation pattern during the execution of a specific effect (big hit effect in this example), and the adjustment operation of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 is restricted. It will be. In the present invention, for example, in the normal adjustment mode in the normal adjustment regulation pattern, only the volume adjustment operation of the audio output device 206 is allowed during the execution of a specific effect (for example, the jackpot effect), and the brightness adjustment operation of the effect display device 200. May be regulated. On the contrary, during the execution of a specific effect, only the brightness adjustment operation of the effect display device 200 may be allowed, and the volume adjustment operation of the audio output device 206 may be restricted.

Here, for example, during the jackpot effect after a lapse of a predetermined time from the time t26, the adjustment operation of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 by the adjustment operation of the adjustment buttons 209 (volume adjustment button 209a, light amount adjustment button 209b) is limited. It is assumed that a specific period, which is a permitted period, has been started. Specifically, at this time, in step S1400-3 of the time schedule management process (see FIG. 51), the specific period start flag is set to the ON state.

In this case, the sub CPU 330a determines in the adjustment button detection control process (FIG. 61) that the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is the normal adjustment regulation state (NO in step S1800-1 → NO in step S1800-3). Further, it is determined that the specific period has started during the jackpot production started at time t26 and the adjustment state is the limited adjustment permission state (YES in step S1800-5), and the volume adjustment button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b are operated. The detection process (step 1800-7) is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 330a determines that the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is the limited adjustment permission state when the specific period is started during the jackpot production, and specifies the adjustment operation of the adjustment button 209. It will be possible to accept only within the period. The limited adjustment permission state accompanying the start of the specific period ends when the specific period ends and the specific period start flag is set to the off state in step S1400-3 of the time schedule management process (see FIG. 51). Then, the adjustment state returns to the normal adjustment regulation state.

As shown in the fourth stage of FIG. 63, the jackpot effect started at time t26 ends at time t27. Specifically, the main control board 300 transmits a post-major game state change designation command indicating a game state set after the end of the major game (step S670-5), and the sub CPU 330a turns off the jackpot start flag. Set. Further, at time t27, it is assumed that no error has occurred in the game machine 100 (see the fifth stage in FIG. 63) and the power saving mode has not been started (see the sixth stage in FIG. 63). As a result, at time t27, as at time t22 and time t24, all four adjustment regulation conditions related to the determination of the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 are not satisfied (second stage, fourth to sixth stages in FIG. 63). As a result, at time t27, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 shifts (returns) from the normal adjustment regulation state to the adjustable state (see the seventh stage in FIG. 63). Further, as the adjustment state becomes adjustable at time t27, the adjustment mode of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 shifts (returns) from the normal mode of the normal adjustment regulation pattern to the normal mode of the normal adjustment permission pattern. ) (See the 8th row in FIG. 63).

In this way, the normal adjustment regulation pattern in the normal adjustment mode is that the adjustment state shifts from the normal adjustment regulation state to the adjustable state, that is, all of the first adjustment condition to the fourth adjustment condition among the adjustment regulation conditions are not satisfied. It ends based on becoming. Here, in the normal adjustment regulation state in which the first adjustment condition is not satisfied, when the second adjustment condition is not satisfied (when no error occurs), the third adjustment condition or the fourth adjustment condition is satisfied. The failure state, that is, the end of the jackpot effect or the cancellation of the power saving mode corresponds to the normal adjustment regulation pattern end condition (an example of the specific adjustment state end condition). That is, the normal adjustment regulation pattern in the normal adjustment mode ends with an end trigger (end of the jackpot effect, cancellation of the power saving mode) different from the above-mentioned transition trigger (for example, start of the jackpot effect, start of the power saving mode). Further, the normal mode of the normal adjustment regulation pattern started with the start of the jackpot effect ends with the lapse of the execution time of the jackpot effect.

Therefore, the normal adjustment regulation pattern end condition also includes the passage of a predetermined time (in this example, the execution time of the jackpot effect). The sub CPU 330a may determine the end of the normal adjustment regulation pattern by the arrival of the end trigger, depending on the type of the adjustment regulation condition, or may determine by the passage of a predetermined time, or the end trigger. The determination may be made in combination with the passage of a predetermined time.

That is, in the normal adjustment regulation pattern, the normal adjustment regulation pattern end condition is satisfied when no error has occurred in the game machine 100 and the error notification has not been executed in the effect device (NO in step S1700-3). It ends based on. Further, in the normal adjustment mode in the normal adjustment permission pattern after the end of the normal adjustment regulation pattern, the operation detection process of the volume control button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b (step S1800-7) in the adjustment button detection control process (see FIG. 61). ) Is executed, the adjustment operation based on the adjustment operation (pressing operation) of the adjustment button 209 (volume adjustment button 209a, light amount adjustment button 209b) is allowed in the voice output device 206 and the effect display device 200. ..

As shown in the fifth stage of FIG. 63, it is assumed that an error (for example, a lower plate full tank error) occurs in the game machine 100 at the time t28 after the lapse of a predetermined time from the time t27, as in the time t7 shown in FIG. Along with this, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 shifts from the adjustable state to the normal adjustment regulation state (see the 7th stage in FIG. 63), and the adjustment modes of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 are the normal adjustment permission patterns. Shifts from the normal adjustment mode of the above to the normal adjustment mode of the normal adjustment regulation pattern (see the eighth stage of FIG. 63). That is, the fact that an error has occurred (the second adjustment regulation condition is satisfied) is an example of an opportunity to shift the normal adjustment regulation pattern to the normal mode.

At time t28, the second condition (error is occurring) of the adjustment regulation condition is satisfied by receiving the error occurrence command and starting the control related to the error notification effect as in the time t7 shown in FIG. .. Therefore, in the adjustment state control process (see FIG. 60) at time t28, the sub CPU 330a determines that an error is occurring and the error notification is being executed (YES in step S1700-3), and the second input permission flag Is set to the off state (step S1700-9). As described above, the second input permission flag is turned off according to the game machine state being the game-enabled state and the error notification being performed. Therefore, at time t28, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 (volume adjustment button 209a, light amount adjustment button 209b) is set to the normal adjustment regulation state as at time t23 and time t26 (see the seventh stage in FIG. 63). ..

Further, in the adjustment button detection control process at time t28 (FIG. 61), the sub CPU 330a outputs audio as in time t23 and time t26 because the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is set to the normal adjustment regulation state. The adjustment modes (volume adjustment mode, brightness adjustment mode) of the device 206 and the effect display device 200 shift from the normal adjustment permission pattern in the normal adjustment mode to the normal adjustment regulation pattern (see the eighth stage in FIG. 63).

Further, as shown in the fifth stage of FIG. 63, at time t29, which is a predetermined time after time t28, the error that occurred at time t28 (in this example, the lower plate full tank error) is cleared. Based on the fact that the error is cleared, the sub CPU 330a ends the notification of the error (error notification effect) started at the time t28 in the same manner as the time t8 shown in FIG. 55.

As described above, since the control related to the error notification effect is completed at the time t29, the second adjustment regulation condition (that an error is occurring) of the adjustment regulation condition is not satisfied (see the fifth stage of FIG. 63). Further, at time t29, the game machine state is maintained in the game-enabled state, the control related to the jackpot effect is not started, and the power saving mode is not in progress (see the second, fourth, and sixth stages in FIG. 63). As a result, as in the case of time t22, time t24 and time t27, all four adjustment regulation conditions related to the determination of the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 at time t29 are not satisfied (second stage and 4 to 6 stages in FIG. Eye). Therefore, at time t29, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 shifts (returns) from the normal adjustment regulation state to the adjustable state (see the seventh stage in FIG. 63).

Further, as the adjustment state becomes adjustable at time t29, the adjustment mode of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 shifts from the normal adjustment mode of the normal adjustment regulation pattern to the normal adjustment mode of the normal adjustment permission pattern. (Return) (see the eighth stage in FIG. 63). As a result, the audio output device 206 allows the volume adjustment operation based on the volume adjustment operation of the volume control button 209a, and the effect display device 200 allows the brightness adjustment operation based on the brightness adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment button 209b. ..

As described above, similarly to the time t22, the time t24 and the time t27, the normal adjustment regulation pattern in the normal adjustment mode is such that the adjustment state shifts from the normal adjustment regulation state to the adjustable state at the time t29, that is, the adjustment regulation condition. Of these, it ends based on the failure of all of the first adjustment regulation conditions to the fourth adjustment regulation conditions. Here, the second adjustment regulation condition is not satisfied (the error is cleared), and the third adjustment regulation condition and the fourth adjustment regulation condition are not satisfied (the jackpot production is not in progress and the power saving mode is not in progress). Corresponds to an example of the end condition of the normal adjustment regulation pattern. That is, the normal adjustment regulation pattern in the normal adjustment mode ends with an end trigger (error cancellation in this example) different from the above-mentioned transition trigger (error occurrence in this example).
In the present invention, the normal adjustment regulation pattern end condition may include that the game ball passes through a predetermined area on the game area 116 (see FIG. 2). As a result, the game machine 100 can end the normal adjustment mode of the normal adjustment regulation pattern regardless of the adjustment regulation condition related to the determination of the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209. The predetermined area may be, for example, the gate 124. Further, when the above-mentioned specific area (not shown) is provided in the game machine 100, the specific area may be a predetermined area related to the normal adjustment regulation pattern end condition. Further, in the game machine 100, the gate 124 may also serve as a specific area.

As shown in the seventh stage of FIG. 63, for example, in the period from time t20 to time t29, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 becomes a special adjustment regulation state based on the execution of the setting change processing, and is predetermined after the end of the setting change processing. At the timing (in this example, the end timing of the game state transition period at time t22), the special adjustment restricted state is shifted to a normal state (adjustable state or normal adjustment restricted state) other than the special adjustment restricted state, and the setting change process is performed. Unless the setting change process is executed again after the end, that is, as long as the game machine state is maintained in the game-enabled state, the normal state does not shift to the special adjustment regulation state.

Further, the adjustment mode of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200, which are controlled based on the adjustment state, becomes the special adjustment mode based on the execution of the setting change processing, and the predetermined timing after the end of the setting change processing (in this example). , The end timing of the game state transition period at time t22) shifts from the special adjustment mode to the normal adjustment mode, and unless the setting change process is executed again after the end of the setting change process, that is, the game machine state becomes a game-enabled state. As long as it is maintained, it does not shift from the normal adjustment mode to the special adjustment mode.

That is, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the adjustment states of the volume control button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b constituting the adjustment button 209 are set to four adjustment regulation conditions as long as the game machine state is maintained in the playable state. Based on the established state, it repeatedly shifts to the adjustable state or the normal regulated state. Further, as long as the game machine state is maintained in the playable state, the volume adjustment mode of the audio output device 206 and the brightness adjustment mode of the effect display device 200 are normally adjusted in the normal adjustment mode according to the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209. Repeated transition to permission pattern or normal adjustment regulation pattern.

As described above, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the voice output device 206 is based on the volume control value corresponding to the progress of the game or the volume control operation of the volume control button (an example of the volume control device) 209a. It is possible to perform a volume control operation to adjust the volume. Further, the audio output device 206 is controlled in a special adjustment mode in which the volume adjustment operation based on the volume adjustment operation is restricted in the setting change state in which the setting change processing can be executed, and the setting change processing cannot be executed (setting confirmation). In the state (state or playable state), the operation based on the volume control operation is controlled based on the allowable normal adjustment mode. In addition, the volume control mode becomes a special control mode based on the execution of the setting change process. Further, the volume adjustment mode shifts from the special adjustment mode to the normal adjustment mode (normal adjustment permission pattern or normal adjustment regulation pattern) at a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process. Further, the volume adjustment mode does not shift from the normal adjustment mode to the special adjustment mode unless the setting change processing is executed again after the setting change processing is completed.

Similarly, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the effect display device 200 determines the brightness based on the brightness control value corresponding to the progress of the game or the brightness adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment button (an example of the brightness adjustment device) 209b. It is possible to perform a brightness adjustment operation to adjust. Further, the effect display device 200 is controlled in a special adjustment mode in which the brightness adjustment operation based on the brightness adjustment operation is restricted in the setting change state in which the setting change processing can be executed, and the setting change processing cannot be executed (setting confirmation). In the state or playable state), the operation based on the brightness adjustment operation is controlled based on the allowable normal adjustment mode. Further, the brightness adjustment mode becomes a special adjustment mode based on the execution of the setting change process. Further, the luminance adjustment mode shifts from the special adjustment mode to the normal adjustment mode (normal adjustment permission pattern or normal adjustment regulation pattern) at a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process. Further, the brightness adjustment mode does not shift from the normal adjustment mode to the special adjustment mode unless the setting change processing is executed again after the setting change processing is completed.

That is, in the game machine 100, the adjustment mode of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 is changed to the special adjustment mode during the execution of the setting change process (when the setting value is changed), so that an unnecessary input operation (this example). Therefore, it is possible to prevent (adjustment operation, which is an input operation of the volume control value and the brightness control value), and reduce the possibility that an input error or the like occurs. Therefore, the game machine 100 can improve the input accuracy of the set value in a state where the set value can be changed.

Further, in FIG. 63, when the power is turned on, the game state is in the setting change state, and when the game state transitions to the game-enabled state after the game machine state transition period, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209, the audio output device 206, and the effect display device 200 An example of the transition of the adjustment mode of is described. On the other hand, when the game machine state is the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on, the adjustment state and the mode of transition of the adjustment mode from the transition to the game-enabled state through the game machine state transition period are shown in FIG. 63. different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, when the game machine state is the setting confirmation state when the power is turned on at time t20, the game machine state is changed based on the end of the setting confirmation process on the main control board 300 at time t21. It is assumed that the game-enabled state is entered, the game-machine state transition period ends at time t22, and the sub-control board 330 is notified that the game-machine state has changed to the game-enabled state. In this example, in the period from time t20 to time t22, the game machine state is the setting confirmation state, the occurrence of an error is not detected, the jackpot effect is not executed (non-execution), and the power saving mode is not in progress (Fig. See the second stage of 64 and the fourth to sixth stages). In other words, all four adjustment regulation conditions are unsuccessful.

Therefore, in this example, as shown in the 7th stage of FIG. 64, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is set to the adjustable state even during the period from the time t20 to the time t22, and accordingly, the 8th stage of FIG. As can be seen, the adjustment modes of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 are the normal adjustment modes in the normal adjustment permission pattern. That is, the sub CPU 330a is not a special adjustment mode that regulates the adjustment operation corresponding to the adjustment operation of the adjustment button 209 during the period of the setting confirmation state (during execution of the setting confirmation process), but is a normal adjustment mode (normal in this example). The adjustment operation control of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 is performed by the adjustment permission pattern). Also in this example, similarly to the time t0 to the time t2 shown in FIG. 58, the period from immediately after the power is turned on until the end of the setting confirmation state is transmitted to the sub-control board 330 (the period from the time t20 to the time t22). In, the setting confirmation state notification effect (see FIG. 59) is executed.

As shown in FIG. 64, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 becomes an adjustable state based on the execution of the setting confirmation process, that is, the setting change process is not executed, and the predetermined timing after the end of the setting confirmation process (this example). Then, even at the end timing of the game state transition period at time t22, the normal adjustment state (adjustable state or normal adjustment regulation state) other than the special adjustment regulation state is maintained, and the power is turned off and the power is turned off after the setting confirmation process is completed. Unless the setting change process associated with the input is executed, that is, as long as the game machine state is maintained in the game-enabled state, the normal adjustment state does not shift to the special adjustment regulation state.

Further, the adjustment mode of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 becomes the normal adjustment mode in the normal adjustment permission pattern based on the execution of the setting confirmation process (the setting change process is not executed), and the setting confirmation process is performed. Even after the end, the normal adjustment mode (normal adjustment normal permission pattern or normal adjustment regulation pattern) is maintained, and unless the setting change processing associated with power off and power on is executed after the end of the setting confirmation process, special adjustment is performed from the normal adjustment mode. Does not switch to mode. That is, the game machine 100 has the adjustment button 209 (in this example, the adjustment button 209) because the operation modes of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 do not become the special adjustment mode when the setting change process (setting value change operation) is not executed. The adjustment operation (pressing operation) of the volume adjustment button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b) can be accepted, and the adjustment operation of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 based on the adjustment operation can be executed.

As a result, the game machine 100 provides the player with a desired gaming environment (in this example, the volume of the sound output from the sound output device 206, the brightness of the effect display unit 200a of the effect display device 200). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the voice output device 206 performs a volume control operation of adjusting the volume based on the volume control value corresponding to the progress of the game or the volume control operation of the volume control button 209a. A special adjustment mode that regulates the volume control operation based on the volume control operation while the setting change process is being executed, and a volume control operation based on the volume control operation when the setting change process is not executed. It is controlled based on a volume control mode, including an acceptable normal control mode. In addition, based on the execution of the setting change process, the volume control mode becomes the special control mode, the volume control mode becomes the normal control mode at a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process, and the setting is changed again after the end of the setting change process. The volume control mode does not shift from the normal control mode to the special control mode unless the process is executed. As a result, the game machine 100 can improve the input accuracy of the set value in a state where the set value can be changed. In addition, the game machine 100 improves the input accuracy of the set value and adjusts the volume of the volume adjustment button 209a by shifting the volume adjustment mode from the special adjustment mode to the normal adjustment mode at a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process. It is possible to improve the game environment (for example, the state of the volume of the sound output from the speaker of the sound output device 206 during the game) by the operation at the same time.

Further, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the effect display device 200 can execute a brightness adjustment operation for adjusting the brightness based on the brightness control value corresponding to the progress of the game or the brightness adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment button 209b. , A special adjustment mode that regulates the brightness adjustment operation based on the brightness adjustment operation while the setting change process is being executed, and a normal brightness adjustment operation based on the brightness adjustment operation is acceptable when the setting change process is not executed. It is controlled based on the brightness adjustment mode including the adjustment mode. In addition, based on the execution of the setting change process, the brightness adjustment mode becomes the special adjustment mode, and at a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process, the brightness adjustment mode becomes the normal adjustment mode, and the setting is changed again after the end of the setting change process. Unless the process is executed, the brightness adjustment mode does not shift from the normal adjustment mode to the special adjustment mode. As a result, the game machine 100 can improve the input accuracy of the set value in a state where the set value can be changed. Further, the game machine 100 improves the input accuracy of the set value and adjusts the brightness of the light amount adjustment button 209b by shifting the brightness adjustment mode from the special adjustment mode to the normal adjustment mode at a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process. It is possible to achieve both improvement of the game environment (for example, the state of brightness of the effect display unit 200a during the game) by operation.

(Second Embodiment)
Next, a second embodiment of the present invention (hereinafter referred to as "the present embodiment") will be described.
The basic configuration of the gaming machine according to the second embodiment is the same as that of the gaming machine 100 according to the first embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a part different from the game machine 100 in the configuration of the game machine 100 according to the second embodiment will be described.

(Example of input state control process and effect button control process in the second embodiment)
In the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the flow of the input state control process (step S1500) and the effect button detection control process (step S1600) of the subtimer interrupt process (see FIG. 44) is different from that of the game machine 100 according to the first embodiment. There is.

Specifically, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 330a determines in the input state control process (see FIG. 52) that the game machine state is not the setting change state (NO in step S1500-1), the first The permission flag is set to the on state (step S1500-9). That is, in the input state control process, the determination of whether or not an error has occurred (step S1500-3) and the determination of whether or not a fluctuation effect is being performed (step S1500-5) are not performed.

As a result, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 330a is in the input state of the effect operation device 208 only when only the first condition out of the three input restriction conditions in the first embodiment is satisfied, that is, when the setting is changed. Is set to the input restricted state (special input restricted state), and if the setting is not changed, the input state is always set to the input enable state. As a result, the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment does not enter the normal input restricted state as in the first embodiment, and does not enter the limited permission state accordingly. Therefore, the input state of the effect operating device 208 in the game machine 100 is either a special input restricted state or an input enable state. Therefore, the game machine 100 can always accept the input operation in the effect operation device 208 except when the setting is changed.

Further, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since the input state of the sub CPU 330a does not include the normal input restriction state, the effect operation device 208 normally inputs the effect control device 208 when the effect button detection control process (see FIG. 53) is executed. The process of determining whether or not it is in a state is not performed. Specifically, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the input state of the effect operating device 208 is not an input enable state (NO in step S1600-1), the sub CPU 330a determines that the input state is a special input restricted state and detects the effect button. The control process is terminated, and the process of determining whether or not it is in the special input restricted state (step S1600-3) and the process of determining whether or not it is in the limited permission state (step S1600-5) are executed with reference to the setting change status flag. do not.

That is, in the present embodiment, the operation mode of the effect device is either the normal mode or the special mode of the normal permission pattern, and does not become the normal mode in the normal regulation pattern. Therefore, the sub CPU 330a controls the effect device in either the normal mode or the special mode of the normal permission pattern. As described above, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the operation mode is the normal mode, the operation based on the input operation of the effect operation device 208 is not restricted. As a result, the game machine 100 can always execute the operation based on the input operation in the effect device except for the period in which the effect device is controlled in the special mode based on the game machine state being the setting change state. .. Therefore, the game machine 100 can further improve the serviceability and the game property while improving the input accuracy of the set value in the state where the set value can be changed.

(Example of adjustment state control process and adjustment button control process in the second embodiment)
Further, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the flow of the adjustment state control process (step S1700) and the adjustment button detection control process (step S1800) of the subtimer interrupt process (see FIG. 44) is the same as that of the game machine 100 according to the first embodiment. It's different.

Specifically, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 330a determines in the adjustment state control process (see FIG. 60) that the game machine state is not the setting change state (NO in step S1700-1), the second The input permission flag is set to the on state (step S1700-11). That is, in the input state control process, it is determined whether or not an error has occurred (step S1700-3), whether or not a jackpot effect is being produced (step S1800-5), and whether or not it is in a power saving mode (step S1800-). 7) is not performed.

As a result, in the present embodiment, the sub CPU 330a has the adjustment button 209 (volume) only when only the first adjustment regulation condition among the four adjustment regulation conditions in the first embodiment is satisfied, that is, when the setting is changed. The adjustment state of the adjustment button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b) is set to the adjustment regulation state (special adjustment regulation state), and when the setting is not changed, the adjustment state is always set to the adjustable state. As a result, the gaming machine 100 according to the present embodiment does not enter the normal adjustment restricted state as in the first embodiment, and does not enter the limited adjustment permitted state accordingly. Therefore, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 in the game machine 100 is either a special adjustment regulation state or an adjustable state. Therefore, the game machine 100 can always accept the adjustment operation with the adjustment button 209 except when the setting is changed.

Further, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, since the adjustment state of the sub CPU 330a does not include the normal adjustment regulation state, the adjustment button 209 is in the normal adjustment regulation state when the adjustment button detection control process (see FIG. 61) is executed. No processing is performed to determine whether or not. Specifically, when the sub CPU 330a determines that the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 is not the adjustable state (NO in step S1800-1), the sub CPU 330a determines that the adjustment state is the special adjustment regulation state and controls the effect button detection. The process is terminated, and the process of determining whether or not the setting change status flag is in the special adjustment restricted state (step S1800-3) and the process of determining whether or not the limited adjustment permitted state is executed (step S1800-5) are executed. do not.

That is, in the present embodiment, the adjustment mode of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 is either the normal mode or the special mode of the normal permission pattern, and does not become the normal mode in the normal regulation pattern. Therefore, the sub CPU 330a controls the adjustment operation of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 in either the normal mode or the special mode of the normal permission pattern.

As described above, in the game machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the volume control mode is the normal control mode, the operation of the voice output device 206 based on the volume control operation of the volume control button 209a is not restricted. As a result, the game machine 100 always performs the volume control operation on the voice output device 206 except during the period in which the volume control operation of the voice output device 206 is controlled in the special mode based on the game machine state being the setting change state. It is possible to perform a volume control operation based on.

Further, when the brightness adjustment mode is the normal adjustment mode, the effect display device 200 is not restricted from operating based on the brightness adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment button 209b. As a result, the game machine 100 always performs the brightness adjustment operation on the effect display device 200 except during the period in which the brightness adjustment operation of the effect display unit 200 is controlled in the special mode based on the game machine state being the setting change state. It is possible to perform a brightness adjustment operation based on.

Therefore, the game machine 100 can appropriately provide the game environment desired by the player while improving the input accuracy of the set value in a state where the set value can be changed.

(Modification example)
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment (first embodiment and second embodiment), and various modifications can be made.

For example, in the above embodiment, the game machine state transition period (see FIG. 55) is an interval until the sub-control board 330 recognizes the transition of the game machine state on the main control board 300. Not limited to this. For example, the game machine state transition period accompanying the end of the setting change state may be a longer period than the period until the subcommand set in the transmission buffer by the main control board 300 is received by the sub-control board 330. Specifically, the game machine state transition period when the game machine state shifts from the setting change state to the game-enabled state is the effect device (effect display device 200, effect accessory device) based on the input operation of the effect operation device 208. 202, the effect lighting device 204 and the sound output device 206) may be a period of a length capable of executing a predetermined operation.

Here, the predetermined operation of the effect device during the game machine state transition period may be, for example, the display of the administrator menu screen. The game machine state transition period accompanying the end of the setting change state is, for example, about 20 seconds, and the effect display is based on the fact that the effect button 208a is pressed (in this example, a long press operation) within the period. The administrator menu screen may be displayed in the unit 200a. Further, in this case, when the sub CPU 330a receives the setting-related end designation command, the sub CPU 330a displays a menu display message image similar to the setting confirmation status notification effect (see FIG. 59) on the effect display unit 200a together with the special input restriction state. May be good.

Further, in the above embodiment, the administrator menu screen and the actual machine custom screen can be displayed by pressing the effect button 208a, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration of the effect operation device 208 other than the effect button 208a (effect). The administrator menu screen and the actual machine custom screen may be displayed by the input operation of the lever 208b and the cross button 218).

Further, in the game machine 100, the menu screen that can be used by the employees of the game store is not limited to the administrator menu screen. For example, the game machine 100 may be configured so that the staff menu screen can be displayed as the menu screen in the effect display unit 200a of the effect display device 200. The staff menu screen is a menu screen that can be used by the employees of the game store, and although the time of the game machine can be set, the change history is not permitted to be viewed, which is different from the administrator menu. In the game machine 100, the staff menu screen can be displayed when the RAM clear process (normal RAM clear process) is performed by pressing the RAM clear button 305 (see FIG. 4) without changing the setting key. This is the menu screen.

For example, the staff menu screen may be configured to be displayable for a predetermined time (for example, 20 seconds) after the RAM clear button 305 is pressed. The staff menu screen may be displayed on the effect display unit 200a based on the pressing of the RAM clear button 305, or the effect button 208a may be long-pressed within the above-mentioned predetermined time as in the administrator menu. It may be displayed. Further, at the time of the normal RAM clear processing, a normal RAM clear notification effect for notifying that the normal RAM clear processing is being performed may be executed. In the normal RAM clear notification effect, a character string image (RAM clear notification image) for notifying that the normal RAM clear process is being performed is displayed on the effect display unit 200a, for example, "RAM is being cleared". In addition, in the normal RAM clear notification effect, the character string image "Press and hold the effect button to enter the staff menu" is displayed in the effect display section, as in the setting confirmation status notification effect. It may be displayed on 200a.

Further, the game machine 100 may display the staff menu screen instead of the administrator menu screen during the game machine state transition period (for example, 20 seconds) accompanying the end of the setting change state. In this case, the staff menu can be used at two timings, that is, during the normal RAM clear processing and during the RAM clear notification after the setting change state is completed. If the staff menu is enabled during the game machine state transition period accompanying the end of the setting change state, a normal RAM clear notification effect that displays a RAM clear notification image is executed during the game machine state transition period. May be good. Further, in the game machine 100, the game machine state becomes a game-enabled state immediately after the setting change state ends, and during the game machine state transition period, the normal game is possible while continuing the normal RAM clear notification effect. You may.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the game machine state is the setting change state (the setting change process is being executed), the operation mode of the effect device is set to the special mode, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the game machine 100, when a specific error (for example, an error that detects the possibility that the set value has been tampered with) has occurred, or an error notification effect for notifying the specific error is executed. If so, the input state of the effect operating device 208 may be a special input restricted state. As a result, the game machine 100 may be configured so that the operation mode becomes a special mode during the occurrence or notification of the specific error. Further, in the game machine 100, even when the setting change process accompanying the power off and power on is not executed (when the setting is not changed), the input state is changed from the normal input state (input enable state, normal input restricted state) to the special input state. It may be configured to be migratable to. For example, in the game machine 100, when the above-mentioned specific error occurs when the game machine state is the game-enabled state, the input state shifts from the normal input state to the special input state, and the operation mode is changed to the normal mode (according to this). You may shift from the normal permission pattern or the normal regulation pattern) to the special mode. That is, the game machine 100 has a special mode in which the operation based on the input operation of the effect operation device 208 is regulated as the operation mode of the effect device, and a normal mode in which the operation based on the input operation of the effect operation device 208 is allowed. , The operation mode should be set to either the special mode or the normal mode based on the game machine state, the progress of the game, the error occurrence status (for example, the type of error occurring), etc. Just do it.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the input state is the normal input restricted state, a limited permission state in which acceptance of the input operation of the effect operating device 208 is permitted in a limited manner may occur, but the present invention is limited to this. I can't. For example, the game machine 100 may have a configuration in which a limited permission state is not generated in a normal input restricted state. Further, the normal input restricting state may be a state in which the degree of restriction on the acceptance of the input operation from the effect operating device 208 is always relaxed as compared with the special input restricting state. For example, the normal input restriction state can accept only the input operation for a part of the configuration of the effect operation device 208 (for example, one of the effect button 208a, the effect lever 208b, and the cross button 218), and the remaining configuration. The input operation may not be accepted. As a result, the normal input restricting state becomes a state in which the acceptance of the input operation of the effect operating device 208 is limitedly allowed, unlike the special input restricting state, even when the limited permission state does not occur. Further, in this case, since the operation mode becomes the normal mode of the normal regulation pattern according to the normal input restriction state, the effect device can operate based on the input operation of a part of the effect operation device 208.

Further, in the above embodiment, the adjustment button 209 is composed of the volume adjustment button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the adjustment button 209 may be only one of the volume adjustment button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b. Further, the adjustment button 209 may be composed of three or more adjustment buttons obtained by adding another adjustment button to the two adjustment buttons of the volume adjustment button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b, or any of the two adjustment buttons. It may consist of two or more adjustment buttons, one of which is added to the other adjustment button.

For example, in the game machine 100, the adjustment button 209 may be provided with an air volume adjustment button capable of adjusting the air volume of the ventilation mechanism used for the effect. As a result, the player can adjust the air volume of the blower mechanism at the time of the production using the blower mechanism. In this case, the adjustment state of the air volume adjustment button may be controlled in the same manner as the volume adjustment button 209a and the light intensity adjustment button 209b. Further, the adjustment mode (air volume adjustment mode) of the ventilation mechanism may be controlled in the same manner as the adjustment mode of the sound output device 206 and the effect display device 200 based on the adjustment state of the air volume adjustment button.

Further, in the above embodiment, the adjustment state of whether or not to accept the adjustment operation is set by using the adjustment button 209 including the volume adjustment button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b as one unit, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the adjustment state of the volume adjustment button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b constituting the adjustment button 209 may be controlled. In this case, the adjustment state control process (see FIG. 60) is individually mounted on the game machine 100 for each of the volume control button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b, and the adjustment regulation condition is set for each adjustment state control process corresponding to each adjustment button. May be different. Since the adjustment states of the volume adjustment button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b can be individually controlled, the sub CPU 330a can control the adjustment operations of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 by different adjustment modes. .. For example, the sub CPU 330a controls the volume control operation of the audio output device 206 in the normal mode according to the normal permission pattern based on the volume control button 209a being inputtable, and the light amount control button 209b is in the normal input regulation state. Based on this, the brightness adjustment operation of the effect display device 200 may be controlled in the normal mode according to the normal adjustment regulation pattern.

Further, the game machine 100 controls the adjustment states of the volume adjustment button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b by individual adjustment state control processing, so that, for example, an effect device that is not used for the error notification effect (for example, during the occurrence of an error). The audio output device 206 or the effect display device 200) can be set to the normal mode in the normal adjustment permission pattern.

Further, in the above embodiment, the light amount adjusting button 209b is configured to be used for a brightness adjusting operation for adjusting the brightness of the effect display unit 200a, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game machine 100 is configured to be able to adjust the brightness of the LEDs constituting the effect lighting device 204 and the frame illumination device (not shown) in addition to the brightness of the effect display unit 200a by the brightness adjustment operation of the light amount adjustment button 209b. May be good. Here, members capable of emitting light, such as an effect display device 200 having an effect display unit 200a, an effect lighting device 204, and a frame lighting device (not shown), are collectively referred to as a "light emitting member (an example of a light emitting device)". That is, the game machine 100 may be configured so that the brightness of the light emitting member can be controlled by the brightness control value.

In this case, by adjusting the brightness control value, the brightness of the light emitting member as a whole in the game machine 100 is adjusted. For example, the number of light emitting members among the plurality of members constituting the light emitting member may be increased or decreased by the brightness adjusting operation of the light amount adjusting button 209b. For example, each time the upper region of the light amount adjustment button 209b is pressed, the number of light emitting members among the light emitting member components is increased, and when the brightness control value is adjusted to the maximum value, all the light emitting members are composed. The members (for example, the effect display device 200, the effect lighting device 204, and the frame lighting device) may be made to emit light. Further, each time the lower region of the light amount adjusting button 209b is pressed, the number of light emitting members among the constituent members of the light emitting member may be reduced. However, even when the brightness control value is adjusted to the minimum value, the effect display unit 200a of the effect display device 200 is maintained in a light emitting state while the brightness is reduced. Further, for example, each time the upper region of the light amount adjusting button 209b is pressed, the brightness of the LEDs constituting the effect lighting device 204 and the frame lighting device among the constituent members of the light emitting member is increased to increase the brightness of the lower region of the light amount adjusting button 209b. Each time the pressing operation is performed, the brightness of the effect lighting device 204 and the LEDs constituting the frame lighting device may be lowered. At this time, the brightness of the effect display unit 200a of the effect display device 200 may be increased or decreased in accordance with the increase or decrease of the brightness of the LEDs of the effect lighting device 204 and the frame lighting device, or the LEDs of the effect lighting device 204 and the frame lighting device may be increased or decreased. Only the brightness may be increased or decreased so that the brightness of the effect display unit 200a is not increased or decreased (fixed).

In this case, when the operation mode of the effect device is the power saving mode, the light emitting member is put into the power saving state by reducing the brightness of each member constituting the light emitting member to the minimum and suppressing the brightness of the entire light emitting member. do it. As a result, the power consumption of the light emitting member in the game machine 100 is reduced.

When adjusting the brightness of the light emitting member, the brightness adjustment created in the brightness adjustment process (see FIG. 62) in step S1810-5 is based on the adjustment operation (pressing operation) of the light amount adjustment button 209b in the adjustable state. The command may also be transmitted to the lighting control unit 360. As a result, as the brightness of the effect display unit 200a is adjusted, the brightness of various lighting devices such as the effect lighting device 204 and the frame lighting device can also be adjusted. That is, the player can adjust the brightness of the light emitting member provided in the game machine 100 to a desired brightness. As a result, the gaming machine 100 can appropriately provide a gaming environment that meets the needs of the player. The light emitting member is not limited to the effect display device 200, the effect lighting device 204, and the frame lighting device, as long as it is a member that can be mounted on the game machine 100 and whose brightness can be adjusted by a control signal, a command, or the like. Good. For example, in the game machine 100, when the button lighting device is provided on the upper surface of the effect button 208a, the button lighting device may be included in the light emitting member whose brightness can be adjusted by the brightness control value.

Further, the gaming machine 100 may be configured so that the brightness of the light emitting member can be set separately. That is, the game machine 100 may be configured so that the brightness of the effect display unit 200a and the brightness of the LEDs of various lighting devices can be set individually. In this case, the game machine 100 may be provided with, for example, an illumination light amount adjusting button capable of adjusting the brightness of the lighting device (effect lighting device 204 or frame lighting device) separately from the brightness of the effect display unit 200a. Further, in this case, when the illumination light amount adjustment button is pressed, a rod-shaped brightness display image (illumination light amount bar image) indicating the brightness control value of the current illumination device may be displayed on the effect display unit 200a.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the game machine state is the setting change state (setting change processing is being executed), the adjustment modes (volume adjustment mode, brightness adjustment mode) of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 are specially adjusted. Although it is said that the mode is set, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the game machine 100, when a specific error (for example, an error that detects the possibility that the set value has been tampered with) has occurred, or an error notification effect for notifying the specific error is executed. If so, the adjustment state of the adjustment button 209 (volume adjustment button 209a, light amount adjustment button 209b) may be a special adjustment regulation state. As a result, the game machine 100 may be configured so that the adjustment mode becomes the special adjustment mode during the occurrence or notification of the specific error. Further, in the game machine 100, even when the setting change process accompanying the power off and power on is not executed (when the setting is not changed), the adjustment state is changed from the normal adjustment state (adjustable state, normal adjustment regulation state) to the special adjustment state. It may be configured to be migratable to. For example, in the game machine 100, when the above-mentioned specific error occurs when the game machine state is the game-enabled state, the adjustment state shifts from the normal adjustment state to the special adjustment state, and the adjustment mode is changed to the normal adjustment mode accordingly. (Normal adjustment permission pattern or normal adjustment regulation pattern) may be shifted to the special adjustment mode. That is, the game machine 100 has a special adjustment mode in which the adjustment operation (volume adjustment operation, brightness adjustment operation) based on the adjustment operation of the adjustment button 209 is regulated as the adjustment mode of the sound output device 206 and the effect display device 200. It has a normal adjustment mode in which the adjustment operation based on the adjustment operation of the button 209 is acceptable, and adjusts based on the game machine state, the progress of the game, the error occurrence status (for example, the type of error occurring), and the like. The mode may be configured to be set to either a special adjustment mode or a normal adjustment mode.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the adjustment state is the normal adjustment regulation state, a limited adjustment permission state in which acceptance of the adjustment operation of the adjustment button 209 is limitedly permitted may occur, but the present invention is limited to this. I can't. For example, the game machine 100 may be configured so that the limited adjustment permission state does not occur in the normal adjustment regulation state. Further, the normal adjustment regulation state may be a state in which the degree of restriction on the acceptance of the adjustment operation from the adjustment button 209 is always relaxed as compared with the special adjustment regulation state. For example, in the normal adjustment restricted state, only the adjustment operation for a part of the adjustment buttons 209 (either the volume adjustment button 209a or the light amount adjustment button 209b) can be accepted, and the adjustment operation for the remaining configuration is accepted. It may be in a non-existent state. As a result, in the normal adjustment restricted state, even when the limited adjustment permitted state does not occur, the acceptance of the adjustment operation of the adjustment button 209 can be limitedly allowed unlike the special adjustment restricted state. Further, in this case, one of the audio output device 206 and the effect display device 200 (for example, the audio output device 206) is adjusted by changing the adjustment mode to the normal adjustment mode of the normal adjustment regulation pattern according to the normal adjustment regulation state. An adjustment operation (volume adjustment operation in this example) based on an adjustment operation of a part of the buttons 209 (for example, the volume adjustment button 209a) is possible.

Further, in the above embodiment, as an example of the device (adjustment device) used for the adjustment operation, the adjustment button 209 composed of the volume control button 209a and the light amount adjustment button 209b has been illustrated. The form of the device (volume control device, brightness control device) is not limited to the button. The form of the adjusting device in the game machine 100 is not particularly limited as long as it has a configuration such as a jog dial type operation unit, a touch panel, a lever, and the like that can be adjusted by the player.

The above-mentioned game characteristics, that is, the progress conditions of the game and various control methods are only examples. For example, the starting conditions for starting the big role lottery for determining whether or not the big role game can be executed, the type and number of the big role games. , Contents, etc. The contents of the game profit given to the player can be appropriately designed to the extent that the object of the present invention can be realized.

In the above embodiment, the main CPU 300a that controls the special game based on the set value corresponds to an example of the game control means. The main CPU 300a that executes the set value related process (FIG. 24) corresponds to an example of the setting changing means.

100 Game machine 200 Production display device 200a Production display unit 202 Production accessory device 204 Production lighting device 206 Audio output device 208 Production operation device 208a Production button 208b Production lever 218 Cross button 209 Cross button 209 Adjustment button 209a Volume control button 209b Light intensity adjustment button 300 Main Control board 300a Main CPU
300b main ROM
300c main RAM
305 RAM clear button 330 Sub control board 330a Sub CPU
330b sub ROM
330c sub RAM
340 Image control unit 350 Voice control unit 360 Lighting control unit 370 Movable body control unit

Claims (5)

A game control means for advancing the game according to one of the set values being set among the set values of a plurality of stages.
A setting changing means capable of executing a setting changing process for changing one setting value in the setting to one of the setting values in a plurality of stages, and a setting changing means.
An audio output device whose volume is controlled by the volume setting value, and
A volume control device that can accept volume control operations that adjust the volume setting value, and
With
The audio output device is
It is possible to execute a volume control operation that adjusts the volume based on the volume setting value corresponding to the progress of the game or the volume control operation of the volume control device.
A special adjustment mode that regulates the volume control operation based on the volume control operation in a state where the setting change process is executed, and a volume control operation based on the volume control operation in a state where the setting change process is not executed. Is controlled based on the volume control mode, including the acceptable normal control mode and
Based on the execution of the setting change process, the volume control mode becomes the special control mode.
At a predetermined timing after the end of the setting change process, the volume adjustment mode becomes the normal adjustment mode.
A gaming machine characterized in that the volume control mode does not shift from the normal control mode to the special control mode unless the setting change process is executed again after the end of the setting change process. The state in which the setting change process can be executed ends based on the specific operation being performed.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the volume control mode is maintained in the special control mode unless the specific operation is performed. The volume control mode may shift to a specific control state that regulates the volume control operation of the voice output device based on the volume control operation when a predetermined shift trigger occurs during the normal control mode.
The specific adjustment state ends based on the fact that the specific adjustment state end condition is satisfied when the notification of the specific mode is not executed in the effect device capable of executing the predetermined effect.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein in the normal adjustment mode after the end of the specific adjustment state, the volume adjustment operation based on the volume adjustment operation is allowed in the voice output device. The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the voice output device does not regulate the volume control operation based on the volume control operation when the control mode is the normal control mode. The audio output device is
Claims 1 to 4 are characterized in that the sound is set to a mute state in which no sound is output, which may result in a power saving state in which power consumption is reduced, and does not shift to the power saving state during the execution of the setting change process. The gaming machine according to any one of the items.

Images